You are on page 1of 388

TM

EBTS PR 3.2
Installation,
Configuration and
Basic Service Manual

European Publications Department.


6866538D01-C, Issued: February 2005.
Computer Software Copyrights

The Motorola products described in this instruction manual may include copyrighted Motorola computer
programmes. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for
copyrighted computer programmes. Including the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted
computer programme. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer programmes contained in the Motorola
products described in this Instruction manual may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express
written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant
either directly or by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent
applications of Motorola, except for the normal nonexclusive, royalty free license to use that arises by operation of
law in the sale of a product.

Copyrights

© 2001 and 2002 Motorola Inc. All rights reserved.

No part of this manual may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any
language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without the prior written permission of Motorola Inc.

Trademarks

Motorola, the Motorola Logo and all other trademarks identified as such herein are trademarks of Motorola Inc. All
other product or service names are the property of their respective owners.

Your Input

...is much appreciated. If you have any comments, corrections, suggestions or ideas for this publication or any
other requirements regarding Motorola publications, please send an e-mail to doc.emea@motorola.com.

ii 6866538D01-C
February 2005
1

1Document History

The following major changes have been implemented in this manual:

Edition Description Date

6866538D01-O New document. Nov-02

6866538D01-A Chapter 1 - EBTS Platform: Nov-03


The EBTS is managed via X21/E1 link by the Zone Control
Manager.

Chapter 3 - Interface Commands:


Removed MMI commands:
The following commands are listed any more, because they are
not applicable with Field Service access:
TSC Configuration Mode:
E1CONFIG
GO
INVALIDATE
LOAD
TSC Application Mode:
STATUS TTG
STATUS X21Q

Chapter 3 - Interface Commands:


New MMI commands:
TSC Application Mode:
STATUS BSLQ
STATUS KEYS
STATUS SEC
BRC:
AIEA
AIR_TRACER
AIR_TRACER_MODE
CCIMMUN
GET BTS_TYPE
STATISTICS

6866538D01-C iii
February 2005
Document History

Edition Description Date

Chapter 3 - Interface Commands:


Updated MMI commands:
TSC Configuration Mode:
LOOP
TSC Application Mode:
STATUS BSLQ
BRC:
HELP

Chapter 3 - Interface Commands,


Chapter 6 - Configuration and Testing:
An X.21 loopback is not supported. The paragraphs referring to
the X.21 site link LOOP/DELOOP command are deleted.

Chapter 8 - TETRA Site Contoller:


New desription of TSC battery removal.

Chapter 8 - TETRA Site Controller


Chapter 11 - Base Radio:
The Service Access connectors on the TSC and BRC front sides
are DB9 female connectors. Table 2-4 with TSC Service Access
pinouts is now Table 8-5 in the TSC chapter.

Service Information: The Chapter European Radio Support


Center (ERSC) was removed. All Service Information are now
in Chapter 1 - EBTS Platform.

General: Replace all references to ’EBTS Service Software


(TESS)’ with ’BTS Service Software’

6866538D01-B Chapter 3 - EBTS Interface Commands Oct 2004


New or updated Site Contoller Application Mode MMI
commands for D5.2:
ATTRIB,
BTS_TYPE,
CRASHDUMP,
DIAG,
EAS_OUT,
EXIT,
KILL,
LOG,
RECEIVE
SEND
STATUS BTS,
STATUS SRI,
TFTP,
WHO.

iv 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Document History

Edition Description Date

Chapter 3 - EBTS Interface Commands


New or updated Base Radio Application Mode MMI commands
for D5.2:
CLS,
EXIT,
GET ACTIVE_TRACES,
GET INFO,
GET PA_STATUS,
SET TRACES_OFF,
HELP,
SET CABINET,
SET POSITION.

Chapter 4 - EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware


Installation:
On page 4-4 a note is added with additional installation and
removal instructions for RFDS moduls. In Chapter 10
references to this note are added in the Cavity Combiner, APM,
and Filter Tray removal sections.

Chapter 6 - Configuration and Testing


New section “Upgrading TSC Software and Configuration
Files”

Chapter 7 - EBTS System Troubleshooting


Changes to meet D5.2 GPS operation features:
Rewritten sections “Troubleshooting”.
Rewritten section “MMI fault indications”.

Chapter 4, Chapter 9 EAS Alarm Connector Pinouts


Paragraph EAS Alarm/Control Connector Pinouts has moved
from Chapter 4 to Chapter 9 Environmental Alarm System

Chapter 9 - Environmental alarm System


In D5.2 the eight EAS alarm outputs may be configured to
respond automatically to certain EBTS state changes or to be
manually controlled.

6866538D01-C Chapter 3 - EBTS Interface Commands Feb 2005


Updated Site Contoller Application Mode MMI command for
D5.1 SER, D5.2 SER:
DISPLAY CONFIG

Chapter 8 - TETRA Site Contoller:


Two E1 Net/Mon/Eqp connector blocks were removed on the
front side. Two 10Base2 ports were removed on the rear side.

6866538D01-C v
February 2005
Document History

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

vi 6866538D01-C
February 2005
C

CTable of Contents

1 Document History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

C Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

F List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1

T List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-1

1 EBTS System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Manual Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1


Icon Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5


Dimetra IP System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
EBTS Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Equipment Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8


Breaker Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Cavity Combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Receiver Multicoupler (RMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Environmental Alarm System (EAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Analog Power Monitor (APM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Site Controller (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
The Site Controller supports the following I/O: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Front Panel Switches, Indicators, and Test Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Base Radio (BR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

6866538D01-C C-1
February 2005
Table of Contents

Base Radio Controller (BRC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13


DC Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Exciter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Power Amplifier (PA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

2 Safety Precautions / Recommended Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Static Sensitive Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

ESD Wriststrap Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Recommended Tools, Equipment, and Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4


Recommended Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Recommended Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Recommended Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Recommended Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

3 EBTS Interface Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

MMI Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Access Levels and Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Site Controller Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3


Site Controller Configuration Mode MMI Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
APM_CONFIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
ATTRIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
CLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
DELOOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
DIR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
EVICT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
FORCE_ACTIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
LOGOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
LOOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
MODEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

C-2 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Table of Contents

MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
PAGE_SIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
PASSWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
PBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
PING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
RECEIVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
SEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
SITELINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
STATUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
TIMEZONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
VER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Site Controller Application Mode MMI Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
ARP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
ATTRIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
AUDIOSTAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
BTS_TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
BRLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
CLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
CRASHDUMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
DIAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
DIR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
DISPLAY CONFIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
EAS_OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
EVICT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
EXIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
KILL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
KVL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
LOGOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
NETSTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
PAGE_SIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
PASSWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
PING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

6866538D01-C C-3
February 2005
Table of Contents

RECEIVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
RGPS_DELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
SEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
SITE_LOCATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
STATUS BR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
STATUS BSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
STATUS BSLQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
STATUS BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
STATUS CRTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
STATUS EAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
STATUS FR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
STATUS FRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
STATUS KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
STATUS LMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
STATUS PEER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
STATUS RIGMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
STATUS SC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
STATUS SEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
STATUS SRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
TFTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
UNLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
VER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
WHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Base Radio Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30


Base Radio Configuration and Application Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
AIEA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
AIR_TRACER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
AIR_TRACER_MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
ATC CAV_PARK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
ATC CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
ATC GET CAV_FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
ATC GET CAV_INP_POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
ATC GET CAV_REFL_POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
ATC GET CAV_STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
ATC GET CAV_VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
ATC GET CAV_VSWR_ALM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
ATC GET CHAN_SPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
ATC GET COMBINER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
ATC GET FWARE_REV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

C-4 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Table of Contents

ATC GET TUNE_TIMO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37


ATC HELP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
ATC RESET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
ATC SANITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
ATC SET CAV_VSWR_ALM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
ATC SET TUNE_TIMO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
CCIMMUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
CLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
DEKEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
EXIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
GET ACTIVE_TRACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
GET ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
GET ALARM_MASK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
GET ALARM_REPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
GET BRC_KIT_NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
GET BRC_REV_NO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
GET BRC_SCRATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
GET BTS_TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
GET CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
GET DEFAULT_TX_POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
GET DSP_SANITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
GET DSP_VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
GET ENET_ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
GET EXCITER_SCALING_FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
GET EX_AD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
GET EX_THRESHOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
GET EX_KIT_NO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
GET EX_REV_NO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
GET EX_SCRATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
GET FWD_PWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
GET FWD_WATTMETER_SCALING_FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
GET INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
GET K_FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
GET MAX_VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
GET MAX_WATTMETER_VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
GET PA_AD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
GET PA_COEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
GET PA_KIT_NO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
GET PA_REV_NO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
GET PA_SCALING_FACTOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

6866538D01-C C-5
February 2005
Table of Contents

GET PA_SCRATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52


GET PA_STATUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
GET PCTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
GET POSITION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
GET PS_AD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
GET REF_PWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
GET REF_WATTMETER_SCALING_FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
GET RESET_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
GET ROM_VER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
GET RPTR_STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
GET RSSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
GET RX(n)_AD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
GET RX(n)_DELTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
GET RX(n)_KIT_NO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
GET RX(n)_REV_NO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
GET RX(n)_SCALING_FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
GET RX(n)_SCRATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
GET RX_FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
GET RX_FRU_CONFIG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
GET RX_INJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
GET RX_MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
GET RX_QSIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
GET RX_STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
GET SYS_GAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
GET TETRA_FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
GET TRAINING_INTERVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
GET TXDC_I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
GET TXDC_Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
GET TXIQ_PH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
GET TXLIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
GET TXLIN_STAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
GET TXLIN2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
GET TXLIN2_STAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
GET TX_FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
GET TX_IF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
GET VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
GET WATTMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
KVL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67

C-6 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Table of Contents

RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
SET ALARM_MASK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
SET ALARM_REPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
SET BRC_SCRATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
SET CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
SET EXCITER_SCALING_FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
SET EX_SCRATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
SET EX_THRESHOLD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
SET FWD_WATTMETER_SCALING_FACTOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
SET K_FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
SET MAX_VSWR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
SET MAX_WATTMETER_VSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
SET PA_SCALING_FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
SET PA_SCRATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
SET PCTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
SET POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
SET REAR_SERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
SET REF_WATTMETER_SCALING_FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
SET RX(n)_DELTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
SET RX(n)_SCALING_FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
SET RX(n)_SCRATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
SET RX_FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
SET RX_FRU_CONFIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
SET RX_INJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
SET RX_MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
SET RX_QSIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
SET SYS_GAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
SET TETRA_FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
SET TONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
SET TRACES_OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
SET TRAINING_INTERVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
SET TXDC_I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
SET TXDC_I_FINAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
SET TXDC_Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
SET TXDC_Q_FINAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
SET TXLIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
SET TXLIN2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
SET TX_FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
SET TX_IF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
SET TXIQ_PH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82

6866538D01-C C-7
February 2005
Table of Contents

SET TXIQ_PH_FINAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83


SET TX_TEST_MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
SET TX_POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
STATISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
VER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85

4 EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Site Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1


Site Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
EBTS Site Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Site Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Special Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
X.21 Facility Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
E1 Facility Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Environmental Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Applicable Codes and Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
AC Service and Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Emergency Generator and Transfer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Surge Arrestors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Power Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Grounding Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Tower Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Site Building and Equipment Grounding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Ground Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Antenna Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Alarm Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Receipt of Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Equipment Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Equipment Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23


Installation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Personnel Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Transportation of the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Lifting Equipment Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
EBTS Pre-Installation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Equipment Cabinet Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Cabinet Bracing Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

C-8 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Table of Contents

Access Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27


Cabinet Position Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Expansion Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Power Supply Equipment Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
External Cabling Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
EBTS Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Cabinet Ground Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
-48 VDC Power Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Base Radio Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
GPS Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Alarm System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
X.21, E1 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

Final Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37


Final Checkout Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Equipment Power-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Powering the Power Supply Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Powering the Equipment Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Equipment Cabinet Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
EAS/Site Controller Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Base Radio/Receiver Multicoupler Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Site Controller Power-Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Redundant Site Controller Power-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Auto Tune Combiner Power-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

Planned Maintenance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

5 Interconnection and Cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Receiver Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Transmit Power Out Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Chassis Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

DC Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

5 MHz/1 PPS and GPS Antenna Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Ethernet Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Site Controller/EAS Intercabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

E1 and X.21 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

6866538D01-C C-9
February 2005
Table of Contents

Cabinet Alarm Harness Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Site Alarm Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

RS-232 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

6 Configuration and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Setup and Testing Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1


MMI Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Setup and Testing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Site Controller Setup and Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3


Site Controller Test Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Service Terminal Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Site Controller Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
E1 Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Dual APM Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Starting The Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
EAS Alarm Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Site Reference Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Redundant Site Controller Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Configuration Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Application Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Redundant BR Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Verification Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Optional Modem Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Equipment Cabinet Setup/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12


Equipment Cabinet Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Base Radio Start-up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Selecting Base Radio Position and Receivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Setting and Accessing Base Radio Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Selecting a Receiver Complement for a Base Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Displaying Base Radio Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Setting RX and TX Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Checking Transmit Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Checking Receive Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Sensitivity Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
BER Floor Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Checking BER of Receiver 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Viewing the Transmit Spectrum (optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24

C - 10 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Table of Contents

VSWR Alarm Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25


Choose an Appropriate Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

Conformance Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26


Site Controller Operation (RF Conformance Testing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Base Radio MMI Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Configuration Mode Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Transmit and Receive Frequency Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Keying Base Radios and Setting Power Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Configuring Test Signal Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Receiver Testing Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Example Test Setups Using Commercially Available Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Test Setup for T1 Test Signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32

Upgrading TSC Software and Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35


Upgrade - Case 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Using SWDLM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Using BTS Service Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Upgrade - Case 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Using SWDLM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Using BTS Service Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38

7 EBTS System Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Site Controller Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1


Site Controller Fault Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
LED Fault Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Troubleshooting Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Troubleshooting: Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Troubleshooting: General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Troubleshooting: TSC Config File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Troubleshooting: BRC Config Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Troubleshooting: BRC Code File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Troubleshooting: General Check of a TSC File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
MMI Fault Indications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Troubleshooting GPS Training and Site Reference Faults (Prior to Release D5.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Troubleshooting: GPS Training and Site Reference Faults (Release D5.2 and later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Troubleshooting: GPS Receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Troubleshooting Site Link Faults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Other Site Controller Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

6866538D01-C C - 11
February 2005
Table of Contents

Base Radio / RFDS / EAS / Miscellaneous Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14


Base Radio Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Troubleshooting Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Recommended Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Troubleshooting Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Routine Checkout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Reported/Suspected Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
BR FRU Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Base Radio Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Station Verification Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Transmitter Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Receiver Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Base Radio Fault Indications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
RF Distribution System Fault Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Environmental Alarm System Fault Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Miscellaneous Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33

8 TETRA Site Controller (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Controller Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1


Performance Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Front Panel Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Rear Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Site Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

FRU Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8


Available FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Site Controller Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Redundant Site Controller Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Lithium Battery Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
TSC Battery Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

9 Environmental Alarm System (EAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Environmental Alarm System (EAS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

C - 12 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Table of Contents

Alarm System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2


Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
EAS Output Relay Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
EAS Alarm/Control Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

FRU Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11


Available EAS FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

10 RF Distribution System (RFDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Available RFDS FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Cavity Combining RF Distribution System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1


Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
General Cavity Combining RFDS Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Receive Branch Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Transmitter to Antenna Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Analog Power Monitor (APM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Theory of Operation of Auto Tune Cavity Combiner (ATCC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Removal/Replacement Procedures (Cavity Combining RFDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Replacement of RFDS Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Anti-Static Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Auto Tune Cavity Combiner Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Auto Tune Cavity Combiner Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Analog Power Monitor (APM) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Expansion Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11


Removal/Installation Procedures Expansion Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Replacement of RFDS Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Anti-Static Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Expansion Cable Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Expansion Cable Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Receiver Multicouplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13


RMC Operation and Receive Signal Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
RMC Alarm Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

6866538D01-C C - 13
February 2005
Table of Contents

RMC Removal/Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15


Replacement of RFDS Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Anti-Static Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Expansion Splitter Board Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Expansion Splitter Board Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
LNA/Splitter Board Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
LNA/Splitter Board Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
I/O Board Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
I/O Board Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Power Supply Board Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Power Supply Board Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Alarm Board Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Alarm Board Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Analog Power Monitor (APM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Alarm/Power Monitor Pinouts and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

11 Base Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Available Base Radio FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Base Radio Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1


Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Performance Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Transmit Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Receive Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

Base Radio Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7


BRC Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Host Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Serial Communication Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Address and Data Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Non-Volatile Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Volatile Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Ethernet Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Digital Signal Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

C - 14 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Table of Contents

TISIC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Station Reference Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Input Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Output Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Remote Station Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14

Exciter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Exciter Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
DAC and Alias filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
Memory Circuitry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
A/D Converter Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
PLA Circuitry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
LNODCT IC Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
Synthesizer Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
774..785 MHz Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
157.3 MHz Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
Regulator Circuitry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
Linear RF Amplifier Stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20

Power Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22


PA Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
DC/Metering Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
Linear Driver Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
RF Splitter Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
Linear Final Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
Interconnect Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
Peripheral Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
Fan Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
Replacement of Fan Assembly in Power Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26

DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-28


DC Power Supply Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-28
Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-29
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30

3X Receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
Definition and Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
Diversity Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
Diversity Uses and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32

6866538D01-C C - 15
February 2005
Table of Contents

Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32


Frequency Synthesiser and VCO Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32
Receiver Front End Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
Custom Receiver IC Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
Address Decode Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
Memory Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-34
A/D Converter Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-34
Voltage Regulator Circuitry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-34

Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-36
Backplane Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-36
Backplane Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-38

A Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

B Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Safety Information Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1


Static Sensitive Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

C Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Available FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

D Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-1

Planned Maintenance Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-1

I Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1

C - 16 6866538D01-C
February 2005
F

FList of Figures

Figure 1-1 Dimetra IP System Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6


Figure 1-2 Equipment Cabinet (Primary Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9
Figure 1-3 Site Controller Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Figure 1-4 Base Radio Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Figure 4-1 Equipment Cabinet Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Figure 4-2 Typical EBTS Site Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Figure 4-3 Mating View of Remote GPS Receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
Figure 4-4 Minimum Distance Eyenut to Lifting Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Figure 4-5 Top View Equipment Rack "Eyenut Alignment" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Figure 4-6 Typical EBTS Site Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Figure 4-7 Junction Panel (Top View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Figure 4-8 Equipment Cabinet Power Distribution Panel (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Figure 4-9 RFDS Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Figure 4-10 EAS Rear Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
Figure 4-11 Equipment Cabinet Circuit Breaker Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Figure 4-12 EAS Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Figure 4-13 Cavity Combiner Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40
Figure 5-1 Receiver Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Figure 5-2 Transmit Power Out Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Figure 5-3 Chassis Grounding Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
Figure 5-4 DC Power Connections Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Figure 5-5 5 MHz/1 PPS Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Figure 5-6 Ethernet Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Figure 5-7 Site Controller/EAS Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Figure 5-8 E1/X.21 Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Figure 5-9 Cabinet Alarm Harness Connections Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Figure 5-10 Site Alarm Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Figure 5-11 RS-232 Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Figure 6-1 BRC Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
Figure 6-2 Antenna Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21
Figure 6-3 Spectrum Analyser Display of Transmitted Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-25
Figure 7-1 Troubleshooting Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Figure 7-2 Procedure 1 Troubleshooting Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Figure 7-3 Procedure 2 Troubleshooting Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Figure 7-4 Transmitted Signal Spectrum (Typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23
Figure 8-1 Site Controller (front view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Figure 8-2 Site Controller (rear view). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Figure 8-3 LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Figure 8-4 Controller Rear Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Figure 8-5 Site Controller functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Figure 8-6 Inserting the Lithium Battery on TSC board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10

6866538D01-C F-1
February 2005
List of Figures

Figure 9-1 Environmental Alarm System (front view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-1


Figure 9-2 EAS Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
Figure 9-3 EAS (rear view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Figure 9-4 EAS User Alarms/Control (P9) and System Alarms/Control (P10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Figure 9-5 User Alarm/Control on Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Figure 10-1 Four-Channel Auto Tune Cavity Combining RFDS (Front View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Figure 10-2 Four-Channel Auto Tune Cavity Combining RFDS Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Figure 10-3 Four-Channel AutoTune Cavity Combiner, front view. (with front cover removed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Figure 10-4 Four-Channel AutoTune Cavity Combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Figure 10-5 Expansion Cable Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12
Figure 10-6 RMC Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-14
Figure 10-7 RMC FRU/Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15
Figure 10-8 RMC Tray in the Service Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-16
Figure 10-9 Analog Power Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-21
Figure 11-1 Base Radio (Front View). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-2
Figure 11-2 Base Radio Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-6
Figure 11-3 Base Radio Controller (with cover removed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-7
Figure 11-4 BR Controller (Front View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-8
Figure 11-5 Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram, Sheet 1 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
Figure 11-6 Base Radio Controller Functional Block Diagram, Sheet 2 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16
Figure 11-7 Exciter (with cover removed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-17
Figure 11-8 Exciter Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-21
Figure 11-9 Power Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-23
Figure 11-10 Power Amplifier Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-27
Figure 11-11 DC Power Supply (Front View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-28
Figure 11-12 3X Receiver (with cover removed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-31
Figure 11-13 3X Receiver Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-35
Figure 11-14 Base Radio Backplane, Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-37
Figure 11-15 Base Radio Backplane, Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-37

F-2 6866538D01-C
February 2005
T

TList of Tables

Table 2-1 Recommended Tools for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4


Table 2-2 Recommended Test Equipment for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Table 2-3 Recommended Parts for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Table 2-4 “Service Access” DB-9 Connector Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Table 2-5 Recommended Tools for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Table 3-1 Set TETRA_Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
Table 4-1 Equipment Cabinet Weight and Floor Loading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Table 4-2 Typical Power Loads and Heat Dissipation Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Table 4-3 Typical Power Consumption of EBTS Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Table 4-4 -48 VDC Power Bus Colour Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Table 4-5 GPS Start-up Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Table 4-6 GPS Antenna Identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Table 4-7 Equipment Cabinet Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Table 4-8 External Cabling Connection Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Table 4-9 Power Connections Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Table 4-10 E1 Connector on Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Table 4-11 X.21 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Table 5-1 Receiver Cabling (Cavity Combining RFDS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Table 5-2 Transmit Power Out Cabling (4-Channel Cavity Combining RFDS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Table 5-3 Ground Straps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Table 5-4 DC Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Table 5-5 5 MHz/1 PPS Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Table 5-6 Ethernet Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Table 5-7 Site Controller/EAS Intercabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Table 5-8 E1/X.21 cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Table 5-9 Cabinet Alarm Harness Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Table 5-10 Site Alarm Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Table 5-11 RS-232 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Table 6-1 Test Equipment for Site Controller Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Table 6-2 RS-232 Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Table 6-3 AT Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Table 6-4 Test Equipment for Equipment Cabinet Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Table 6-5 Base Radio LED Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Table 6-6 Example: 8 Base Radio Omni-EBTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Table 6-7 Transmit Level Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Table 6-8 set tetra_format variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Table 6-9 set tx_test_mode variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Table 6-10 get rssi command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Table 7-1 LED Fault Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Table 7-2 Site Reference Reasons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Table 7-3 Site Reference States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

6866538D01-C T-1
February 2005
List of Tables

Table 7-4 BRC Config File Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5


Table 7-5 Other Site Controller Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Table 7-6 Recommended Test Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Table 7-7 80 Watt PA Transmitter Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Table 7-8 Base Radio Fault Indications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Table 7-9 RFDS Fault Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Table 7-10 EAS Fault Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Table 7-11 Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Table 8-1 Controller Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Table 8-2 System Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Table 8-3 Front Panel Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Table 8-4 Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Table 8-5 Controller Rear Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Table 9-1 EAS Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Table 9-2 EAS Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Table 9-3 EAS Output Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Table 9-4 EAS Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Table 9-5 User Alarm Inputs (P9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Table 9-6 System Alarm Inputs (P10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Table 9-7 Internal Alarm Inputs (P5, P6, P7, P8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Table 9-8 User Relay Outputs (P9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Table 9-9 System Relay Outputs (P10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Table 9-10 Internal Relay Outputs (P5). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Table 10-1 Cavity Combiner General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Table 10-2 Auto Tune Cavity Combining Transmitter Port-to-Antenna Port Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Table 10-3 Antenna Port-to-Receiver Port Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Table 10-4 Key Specs for APM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Table 10-5 Pin Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Table 10-6 I/O Board Rear Panel Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Table 10-7 Power Monitor DB-9 Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Table 10-8 I/O Board Power Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Table 11-1 Base Radio General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Table 11-2 Transmit Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Table 11-3 Receive Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Table 11-4 BR Controller Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Table 11-5 BR Controller Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Table 11-6 Service Access Connector Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Table 11-7 BR Controller Circuitry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Table 11-8 Exciter Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
Table 11-9 Power Amplifier Circuitry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
Table 11-10 DC Power Supply Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-29
Table 11-11 DC Power Supply Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-29
Table 11-12 DC Power Supply Circuitry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30
Table 11-13 3X Receiver Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32
Table 11-14 Base Radio Backplane Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-36
Table 11-15 BRC P1 Pinout, Signal and Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-38
Table 11-16 RX1 P2 Pinout, Signal and Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-39
Table 11-17 RX1 P3 Pinout, RF Input and Output Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-39
Table 11-18 Backplane Alarm 25-Pin Dsub (P7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-39
Table 11-19 PA P6 Pinout, Signal and Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-40
Table 11-20 EX P5 Pinout, Signal and Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-41
Table 11-21 Backplane RS-232 Pin Dsub (P8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-42
Table 11-22 -48 VDC Battery Power (P12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-43
Table 11-23 P11 Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-43

T-2 6866538D01-C
February 2005
List of Tables

Table 11-24 Backplane Coaxial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-43


Table 11-25 EX P14 EX OUT, P15 EX FB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-43
Table 11-26 EXBRC P16 PA FB, P17 PA IN, P18 PA RF OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-44
Table 11-27 Blind Mates - Receivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-44
Table 11-28 PS Power and Signal (P9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-44
Table 11-29 Base Radio Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-45
Table C-1 Available Frequency Replacable Units (FRUs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Table D-1 Field Replacable Units PMIs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-2
Table D-2 Receiver Multicoupler PMIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-2
Table D-3 Combiner PMIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-2

6866538D01-C T-3
February 2005
List of Tables

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

T-4 6866538D01-C
February 2005
1

1EBTS System Overview

Manual Overview
About This Manual

This manual is intended to provide an overview of the Enhanced Base Transceiver System
(EBTS) within the Dimetra System.
The information in this manual is current as of the issue date. Changes which occur after the issue
date will be incorporated through use of manual updates or revisions.

Intended Audience

It targets the following audiences within the user community:


Operations Group - This group is responsible for the day-to-day system operation and comprises
system administrators and communication specialists, usually under the supervision of an
operations manager.
Field Technicians / Engineers - Responsible for installation, configuration, support of customer
systems, and FRU replacement.
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the operating principles of Motorola Dimetra trunked
radio equipment or similar.

6866538D01-C 1-1
February 2005
EBTS System Overview

Icon Conventions
The document set is designed to give the reader more visual cues. The following graphic icons
are used throughout the documentation set. These icons and their associated meanings are
described below.

Notes define terminology, refer the reader elsewhere for additional information, remind the reader
how to complete an action (when it’s not part of the current procedure, for instance), or tell the
reader where something is located on the screen. There is no warning level associated with a Note.

Information that is crucial to the discussion at hand, but that is not a Caution or Warning, receives
an Important icon. There is no warning level associated with text tagged with the Important icon.

The caution icon implies information that must be carried out in a certain manner to avoid
problems, procedures that may or may not be necessary as determined by the reader’s system
configuration, and so on. Although no damage will occur if the reader does not heed the caution,
some steps may need repeating.

The warning icon implies potential system damage if the instructions or procedures are not
carried out exactly, or if the warning is not heeded. This is the highest level of warning.

1-2 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS System Overview

Service Information
Maintenance Philosophy

Various equipment within the Dimetra Enhanced Base Transceiver System (EBTS) has been
designed with a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) concept to minimise system down time. Faulty
FRUs may be quickly and easily replaced with replacement FRUs. This helps to quickly bring the
system back to normal operation.
Due to the high percentage of surface mount components and multi-layer circuit boards, field
component-level repair is discouraged for all equipment. The European System Management
Centre should be contacted for further troubleshooting and repair.

Service and Replacement

Each FRU has a bar code label attached to its front panel. This label identifies the assembly’s
sequential serial number. Log this number whenever contacting the European Systems Support
Centre. For complete information on ordering replacement assemblies, or instructions on how to
return faulty assemblies for repair.

Call Management Centre

Customers within the EMEA region should contact the Call Management Centre for all Service
related enquiries unless they have alternative contractual arrangements. Enquiries to the centre
will be allocated a tracking number and will be routed to the relevant department within Motorola.
The Call management Centre operates a 24 hour by 7 day service.

6866538D01-C 1-3
February 2005
EBTS System Overview

European Systems Support Centre (ESSC)

The EMEA Systems Support Centre provides a technical consulting service. This
service is accessed via the Call Management Centre.

Jays Close, Viables Industrial State


Basingstoke, Hampshire RG22 4PD,
United Kingdom

Call Management Centre:


Telephone: +44 1256 484448
E-mail: ESSC@motorola.com

European Systems Component Centre (ESCC)

The European System Component Centre provides a repair service for infrastructure
equipment, including the EBTS. Customers requiring repair service should contact the
Call Management Centre to obtain a Return Material Authorization number (RMA).

The equipment should then be shipped to the following address unless advised
otherwise.The Systems Component Centre is available at:

Motorola GmbH CGISS


European System Component Centre
Am Borsigturm 130
13507 Berlin
Germany

Telephone: +49 30 66861414


Telefax: +49 30 66861426
E-mail: ESCC@motorola.com

Parts Identification and Ordering

Request for help in identification of non-referenced spare parts should be directed to


the Customer Care Organization of Motorola’s local area representation. Orders for
replacement parts, kits and assemblies should be placed directly on Motorola’s local
distribution organization or via the Extranet site Motorola Online at
https://emeaonline.motorola.com.

EMEA Test Equipment Support


Information related to support and service of Motorola Test Equipment is available by
calling the Motorola Test Equipment Service Group in Germany at +49 6128 702179,
Telefax +49 6128 951046, through the Customer Care Organization of Motorola’s local
area representation, or via the Internet at:
http://www.gd-decisionsystems.com/cte/.

1-4 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS System Overview

System Overview
Dimetra is a digital communications system which provides the dispatch features defined in the
TETRA (Terrestrial Trunked Radio) standard. Dimetra provides a concept of a wide-area trunked
communications system, where an RF coverage area is a provided by number of Remote Sites
connected to the Network Infrastructure.
The system allows users with mobile and portable subscriber units to communicate with one
another and the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) using the RF system as the medium.
The RF system consists of strategically located Enhanced Base Transceiver Systems (EBTS)
which are linked to the Network Infrastructure. The Network Infrastructure in turn provides the
connectivity to the PSTN.
Private dispatch calls, group dispatch calls, private full-duplex calls and full-duplex mobile to
land, land to mobile and mobile to mobile telephony calls, Short Message Service (SMS) and
Packet Data services are all supported.
The network elements that constitute the Dimetra system are fully managed, allowing remote
configuration and maintenance of the system.

Dimetra IP System Overview


The Motorola TETRA network solutions, Dimetra IP, are based on existing proven technologies
that have been modified as appropriate to support the TETRA standard.
The Dimetra IP system provides telephone interconnect, two way dispatch and data services for
private and public safety networks.
Dimetra-P features include:
• Voice Services
• Data Services
• Supplementary Services
• Dispatch Console Operator Features
• Dispatch Console Management Features
• Radio Control Management Features
• Network Management Features
• Mobile Station Features
Mobility Management is fully supported to allow continuity of service as subscribers move
through the network coverage area.
The network elements that constitute the Dimetra IP system are fully managed, allowing remote
configuration and maintenance of the system.
The Dimetra IP System elements can be broadly divided into those elements that provide
interconnect (telephony) functionality, those that provide dispatch functionality, those that
provide system connectivity and those responsible for system element management.

6866538D01-C 1-5
February 2005
EBTS System Overview

EBTS
EBTS X21/E1 Link between
EBTS and Dimetra IP Infrastructure

Dimetra IP
Infrastructure

EBTS
EBTS

Figure 1-1 Dimetra IP System Block Diagram

EBTS Platform
The TETRA EBTS consists of the Site Controller, an Environmental Alarm System, one or more
Base Radios (BR), and a radio frequency distribution system (RFDS).
The EBTS provides the interface between the mobile radio units within the Dimetra system and
the rest of the network. The main functions of the EBTS are listed below:
• Base Radio Transceiver
• Radio link formatting, coding, timing, framing and error control
• Timing control supervision to mobile stations (timing advance)
• Radio link quality measurements (Signal Quality Estimate)
• Site to site frame synchronisation
• Interface translation - radio link to network “land” equipment
• Switching functions between base transceivers
• Operation, maintenance and administration agent
It is possible to equip the EBTS with a redundant Site Controller to permit continued site
operation should the primary Site Controller fail.
The Site Controller (TSC) controls the BR’s via an Ethernet LAN. The Dimetra IP EBTS uses an
X.21/E1 connection for communication with other network elements.
In Dimetra IP systems the Site Controller may be configured to control a redundant Base Radio
to provide back-up Base Radio operation, in the event of a Base Radio failing. If configured this

1-6 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS System Overview

Base Radio can also be switched in by the Central Network Equipment (CNE) to provide extra
capacity. This feature is configured by the TETRA EBTS Service Software (TESS). The
redundant BR feature requires an Auto Tune Cavity Combiner (ATCC) to operate, as the standby
BR must be able to configure itself to the radio frequency used by a failed BR. In systems with
multiple ATCCs, minimum channel separation must not only be maintained between channels on
each ATCC, but also between channels of all ATCCs. This allows the redundant BR to be able to
replace any failed BR and allows the redundant BR's ATCC to maintain correct channel
separation. Note that, only the last BR in the EBTS may be configured as the redundant BR.
The EBTS works in conjunction with the mobile stations to make measurements that are used in
the handover decision process when interconnect calls are in progress and the mobile stations are
moving in and out of the EBTS coverage area.
The Dimetra IP EBTS is managed by the Zone Control Management (ZCM), communication
between the EBTS and the ZCM takes place over the X.21/E1 link. The ZCM can download new
configuration files to the EBTS and receive alarm/event and performance statistic information
from the EBTS.

6866538D01-C 1-7
February 2005
EBTS System Overview

Equipment Cabinet
The EBTS Equipment Cabinet contains RF and control equipment. It provides the radio
communication link between the land network and the mobile/portable units. The EBTS site
consists of one cabinet (Primary Rack) or two cabinets (Primary and Expansion Rack).
The Equipment Cabinet is a self-contained 1.845-metre (37 EIA RU) cabinet that contains the
various equipment modules. Figure 1-2 shows an Equipment Cabinet fitted with a cavity
combining RF Distribution System (RFDS).
The equipment modules contained in a Primary Rack are as follows:
• Breaker Panel
• Junction Panel (top of cabinet)
• Analog Power Monitor Tray (with two Analog Power Monitors)
• Auto Tune Cavity Combiner
• Receiver Multicoupler (RMC) for Primary Rack
• Filter Tray (not part of the standard equipment)
• Environmental Alarm System (EAS)
• Two Site Controllers
• Four Base Radios
The equipment modules contained in an Expansion Rack are as follows:
• Breaker Panel
• Junction Panel (top of cabinet)
• Auto Tune Cavity Combiner
• Receiver Multicoupler (RMC) for Expansion Rack
• Four Base Radios
The Site Controller and Base Radios are interconnected via an Ethernet Local Area Network
(LAN). The Site Controller also interfaces communication between the Network Infrastructure
and the EBTS via an X.21/E1 link in a Dimetra IP system.
For a complete description of each module, refer to the appropriate chapter. Each chapter contains
an overview, a description of switches, indicators, and test connectors, and a functional
description of each module. Troubleshooting and removal/ replacement procedures are also
included for Field Replaceable Units (FRUs).

1-8 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS System Overview

BR1 BR3 RFS1 RFS3 CTRL A BR2 BR4 RFS2 EAS/IMU CTRL B

ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

JUNCTION PANEL
STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3 RFS1 RFS2 BR3 BR4 BR1 BR2

OFF

25A
OFF

25A
OFF

3A
OFF

3A
OFF

7.5A
OFF

25A
OFF

25A
OFF

3A
OFF

7.5A
OFF

7.5A
OFF

BREAKER PANEL B -48Vdc A B RETURN A

ANALOG POWER
ANALOG POWER MONITOR MONITOR

CAVITY COMBINER

CAVITY COMBINER

CAVITY COMBINER
RECEIVER
MULTICOUPLER
RECEIVER MULTICOUPLER

ENVIRONMENTAL ALARM SYSTEM

ENVIRONMENTAL -48V RTN


Motorola
CONTROLLER A
PARALLEL
CONTROLLER B
PARALLEL
CONTROL RF1
e

SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL
e

Ac ut

USER ALARM/CONTROL
at

e
r

Ac t
tiv
we

tiv

ENVIRONMENTAL
pu
er

tp
Po

Op

Ou
In

ALARM SYSTEM
Power Tanapa No.: CLN1685 RF2 RF3

ALARM SYSTEM GPS


INPUT -48V , 0.5A
r

e
we

4 3 2 1
tiv

PS

4 3 2 1
Po

Ac

DCE Net Eqp


SITE REF OUT

SITE CONTROLLER A
Net Eqp Power
T1/E1
O
LO

Ye

AI

FE

BP

Net

Lo

BAT
O

Service Access Sel/ Abort/


ca
llo

/C
S/

V/
F

Mon Net Mon Eqp Net Mon Eqp Net Mon Eqp Net Mon Eqp
w

l
RC

PD

Loop Reset X.21


-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1 10/100B-T

GPS
r

e
we

4 3 2 1
tiv

PS

4 3 2 1
Po

Ac

DCE Net Eqp


SITE REF OUT

SITE CONTROLLER B
Net Eqp Power
T1/E1
O
LO

Ye

AI

FE

BP

Net

Lo

BAT
O

Service Access Sel/ Abort/


ca
llo

/C
S/

V/
F

Mon Net Mon Eqp Net Mon Eqp Net Mon Eqp Net Mon Eqp
w

l
RC

PD

Loop Reset X.21


-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1

RX 3
RECEIVER

GROUN AC
RX 2
RECEIVER

DC

POWER SUPPLY RECEIVER


BASE RADIO RX 1 RE
BLACK

(BR #4)
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

EXCITER STAT B R P S E X PA C T L R 1 R 2 RESE CONTROL


US R3 T

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

TETRA 75W
POWER AMPLIFIER

RX 3
RECEIVER

GROUN AC
RX 2
RECEIVER

DC

POWER SUPPLY RECEIVER


BASE RADIO RX 1 RE
BLACK

(BR #3)
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

EXCITER STAT B R P S E X PA C T L R 1 R 2 RESE CONTROL


US R3 T

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

TETRA 75W
POWER AMPLIFIER

RX 3
RECEIVER

GROUN AC
RX 2
RECEIVER

DC

POWER SUPPLY RECEIVER


BASE RADIO RX 1 RE
BLACK

(BR #2)
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

EXCITER STAT B R P S E X PA C T L R 1 R 2 RESE CONTROL


US R3 T

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

TETRA 75W
POWER AMPLIFIER

RX 3
RECEIVER

GROUN AC
RX 2
RECEIVER

DC

POWER SUPPLY RECEIVER


BASE RADIO RX 1 RE
BLACK

(BR #1)
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

EXCITER STAT B R P S E X PA C T L R 1 R 2 RESE CONTROL


US R3 T

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

TETRA 75W
POWER AMPLIFIER

FRONT VIEW BACK VIEW


TEBTS018B

Figure 1-2 Equipment Cabinet (Primary Rack)

6866538D01-C 1-9
February 2005
EBTS System Overview

Breaker Panel
The Breaker Panel is mounted in the uppermost location of the Equipment Cabinet, as shown in
Figure 1-2. This is the central location for power distribution and overload protection of the
Equipment Cabinet.
Each circuit breaker is dedicated to a single module within the Equipment Cabinet. The circuit
breakers provide manual on/off control for the modules, as well as providing automatic
disconnect in the event of an electrical overload.

Junction Panel
The Junction Panel provides a central location for cabinet grounding and intercabling. Access to
the Junction Panel is gained from the top of the Equipment Cabinet.
The Junction Panel is mounted at the top of the Equipment Cabinet toward the rear, as shown in
Figure 1-2.

Cavity Combiner
The cavity combiner is a tuned 915-950 MHz transmit combining system for 4 channels.
The cavity combiner is mounted, as shown in Figure 1-2.

Receiver Multicoupler (RMC)


The Receiver Multicoupler (RMC) is an active receive multicoupler assembly that provides
multiple receive signal ports. Each diversity branch antenna is connected to a module in the
Receiver Multicoupler. Each RMC module is then correspondingly connected to one receiver in
each of the BRs.
The Receiver Multicouplers are mounted below the Cavity Combiner, as shown in Figure 1-2.

Environmental Alarm System (EAS)


The EAS provides a central location for alarm signals into the EBTS site. The EAS provides an
electrical interface to monitor such environmental conditions as site power, smoke detectors, and
intrusion (burglar) detectors. Only one EAS is used per site.
The EAS also receives alarms from the Breaker Panel and the RFDS. Base Radio alarms are sent
directly to the Site Controller over the Ethernet LAN.
The EAS accepts 48 alarm inputs and provides eight control outputs. The inputs are opto-isolated
and sense contact closure between the alarm sensor and its return. Four RJ-45 connectors are used
for the alarm connections within the Equipment Cabinet. The remaining alarm inputs and control
(relay) outputs are accessible via two 50-pin subminiature-D connectors, one of which is
accessible via the Junction Panel. The eight alarm outputs may be configured to respond
automatically to certain EBTS state changes or to be manually controlled. The EAS contains its
own power supply.

1 - 10 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS System Overview

The eight alarm outputs are not supported with System Releases prior to D5.2.

The EAS module is mounted below the Receiver Multicoupler area, as shown in Figure 1-2.
Alarm wiring is connected to the EAS via the junction panel at the top of the EBTS. Some of the
connections are dedicated to specific equipment, although several inputs are available for
assignment by the customer. The EAS interfaces with the Site Controller(s) via an IEEE 1284
interface.

Analog Power Monitor (APM)


The Analog Power Monitor monitors the forward and reflected power. The Analog Power
Monitor Tray is located above the Cavity Combiner. The power monitor outputs a 0-5V voltage
corresponding power levels between 0 - 320W.The first APM monitors the power of the Primary
Rack, the second APM monitors the power of the Expansion Rack (if installed).

Site Controller (TSC)


The TSC assigns available frequencies and slots to the mobiles. It also communicates with the
network via an X.21 or E1 link for Dimetra IP.
One TSC is required per EBTS configuration, the other TSC presence a redundance (the active
and the standby TSC is linked via the 10/100BaseT Ethernet interface).
The TSC receives Global Positioning System (GPS) signals via the GPS interface, which it uses
to develop high-precision system timing signals. The EAS interfaces with the TSC via the IEEE
1284 interface to communicate alarm signals from the EBTS to the network management centre.
The Base Radios communicate with the TSC via the 10Base2 Ethernet interface.

The Site Controller supports the following I/O:


• One 10/100BaseT Ethernet port
• Three 10Base2 Ethernet ports
• Four T1/E1 connections
• One X.21 connection
• One IEEE 1284 parallel port (for connecting to the EAS)
• One front panel RS232 MMI
• Three time / frequency reference outputs
• GPS (internal receiver)
• RJ45 Serial
• RJ45 Redundancy
Figure 1-3 shows a block diagrams of the Site Controller and the I/O interfaces.

6866538D01-C 1 - 11
February 2005
EBTS System Overview

SITE CONTROLLER
BLOCK DIAGRAM

L2 CACHE

MEMORY

CPU

RS232 SERIAL
RS232 MMI
COMMUNICATIONS
PROCESSOR X.21

10/100 BASE T ETHERNET


3
10 BASE 2 ETHERNET

QUAD
T1/E1 4
FRAMER/ T1/E1
LINE DRIVER

IEEE 1284
INTERFACE EAS

GPS ANTENNA
+5V
POWER SITE
-48V SUPPLY REFERENCE 3 1PPS/5MHZ
+3.3V SITE REFERENCE

iSC412
011101JNM

Figure 1-3 Site Controller Block Diagram

Front Panel Switches, Indicators, and Test Connectors


The Site Controller front panel is equipped with several switches, indicators, and test connectors
as follows:
• Power switch
• Push-button Abort/Reset. NB this button must be pressed for two seconds or more to
perform a CPU reset
• Push-button Sel/Loop selects a span or initiates network loopbacks
• Power LED
• Green LED Active site reference status
• Green LED indicator for GPS status
• Span and E1 connection status LEDs

1 - 12 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS System Overview

• Monitor SMB port for monitoring time/frequency standard signals


• DB-9 service access connector for Man-Machine Interface (MMI)
• Network Access bantam jacks - bantam jacks provide access for servicing the E1 network.
These items are discussed in greater detail in Chapter 8, “TETRA Site Controller (TSC)”.

Base Radio (BR)


The Base Radio provides reliable digital communications capabilities by incorporating a compact
software-controlled design. Increased channel capacity is achieved through voice compression
techniques and time division multiplexing. Each BR is made up of the following FRUs:
• Base Radio Controller
• Power Supply
• Receiver
• Exciter
• Power Amplifier
Figure 1-4 shows a block diagram of the Base Radio. Each module of the Base Radio is
individually discussed below.

DC POWER SUPPLY
RECEIVER
MODULE EXTERNAL
MODULE
DC INPUT
-41 to -60 VDC

FROM RFDS RF IN
(RX ANT)

}
+14.2 VDC
TO BR
+5.1 VDC
DATA/CONTROL/TIMING BUSES CIRCUITS
+28.6 VDC

BASE RADIO CONTROLLER


MODULE
5 MHz/1 PPS
EXT REF
TO/FROM EXCITER
ETHERNET MODULE

POWER AMPLIFIER
MODULE
TO RFDS RF OUT
(TX ANT) RF FEEDBACK

RF IN

TEBTS027
040801JNM

Figure 1-4 Base Radio Functional Block Diagram

Base Radio Controller (BRC)


The BRC serves as the main controller of the Base Radio. The BRC provides signal processing
and operational control for the other Base Radio modules.

6866538D01-C 1 - 13
February 2005
EBTS System Overview

DC Power Supply
The DC Power Supply provides conditioned DC operating voltages to the various Base Radio
FRUs. It accepts an input voltage range of -41 to -60V.

Receiver
The Receiver provides the receive functions for the Base Radio. The receiver module contains
three separate receivers to allow receive diversity using multiple receive antennas.

Exciter
The Exciter, in conjunction with the Power Amplifier (PA), provides the modulation and
transmitter functions for the Base Radio.

Power Amplifier (PA)


The PA, in conjunction with the Exciter, provides the transmitter functions for the Base Radio.
The PA accepts the low-level modulated RF signal from the Exciter and amplifies the signal for
transmission via the RF output connector.

Each module is described in greater detail in Chapter 11, “Base Radio”.


The BRs are mounted in the lower-most rack positions, as shown in Figure 1-2. The first BR is
installed at the bottom of the cabinet. The next BR is installed above the first and each additional
BR is installed above the previous one.

1 - 14 6866538D01-C
February 2005
2

2Safety Precautions /
Recommended Tools

Safety Precautions

Introduction
Below is a brief summary of some of the safety precautions that should be taken into account
when working with the EBTS. They are not exhaustive and all personnel should ensure they
comply with any additional precautions applicable when using test equipment or facilities.

Static Sensitive Precautions


The static grounding wrist strap (Motorola P/N 4280385A59) must always be used when
handling any board or module within the EBTS. Many of the boards or modules used in the EBTS
equipment are vulnerable to damage from static charges.
Extreme care must be taken while handling, shipping, and servicing these boards or modules. To
avoid static damage, observe the following precautions:
• Prior to handling, shipping, and servicing EBTS equipment, connect a wrist strap to the
grounding clip on the Equipment Cabinet. This discharges any accumulated static charges.

Use extreme caution when wearing a conductive wrist strap near sources of high voltage. The low
impedance provided by the wrist strap also increases the danger of lethal shock should accidental
contact with high voltage sources occur.

• Avoid touching any conductive parts of the module with your hands.
• Never remove boards or modules with power applied to the unit (hot-pull) unless you have
verified it is safe to do for a particular board or module. Make sure the unit will not be
damaged by this. Several boards and modules require that power be turned off before any
boards or modules are removed.
• Avoid carpeted areas, dry environments, and certain types of clothing (silk, nylon, etc.)
during service or repair due to the possibility of static buildup.
• Apply power to the circuit under test before connecting low impedance test equipment
(such as pulse generators). When testing is complete, disconnect the test equipment before
power is removed from the circuit under test.

6866538D01-C 2-1
February 2005
Safety Precautions / Recommended Tools

• Be sure to ground all electrically powered test equipment. Connect a ground lead (-) from
the test equipment to the board or module before connecting the test probe (+). When
testing is complete, remove the test probe first, then remove the ground lead.
• Lay all circuit boards and modules on a conductive surface (such as a sheet of aluminium
foil) when removed from the system. The conductive surface must be connected to ground
through 100k Ω.
• Never use non-conductive material for packaging modules being transported. All modules
should be wrapped with static sensitive (conductive) material. Replacement modules
shipped from the factory are packaged in a conductive material.

Any device (i.e., power supply) providing isolation between the mains and the EBTS must
provide reinforced insulation to hazardous voltages. The DC power source providing power to
the EBTS shall comply with requirements specified for a safety extra low voltage circuit (SELV)
per EN60950, 1995.

Equipment has two independent power sources (A and B). To remove power from equipment,
disconnect both power sources.

Always use appropriate lifting equipment and numbers of personnel when moving an EBTS
equipment cabinet to reduce the risk of tipping. A fully configured equipment cabinet weighs
approximately 276 kg (608 lbs). Tipping can result in serious injury and extensive equipment
damage.

The Dimetra IP EBTS System Manual is intended for trained technicians experienced with
Motorola base radio equipment or similar types of equipment.

The site controller board contains a lithium battery. Refer to local regulatory requirements for
proper disposal.

2-2 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Safety Precautions / Recommended Tools

ESD Wriststrap Safety Precautions


All EBTS platforms have had a small stainless steel bracket mounted on the front left-hand side,
held by a metal surface screw.
The purpose of this bracket is to give a service or installation technician a point to which a wire
from a wrist strap can be connected. This is for ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) protection.
The purpose of this TIB is to emphasise the need and the use of the ESD bracket and use of wrist
strap.
The ESD point is a small bracket that is mounted with one of the screws that holds a unit.
• In PR3.2 it is placed in the front of the redundant TSC just above Base Radio 4. If there is no
redundant TSC it is placed on a blank panel at the same position.
In order to make good electrical contact with the rack frame, the cage nut in which the screw is
mounted is a special grounding type, which has “teeth” that cut through the paint of the rack
frame. The screw that holds the bracket is made of steel, which is not painted black for the same
reason.
There are two cases where special attention must be made.
1 Removal of the ESD point

The ESD bracket will have to be removed temporarily in two cases.


• Service of the redundant TSC.
• Installation/replacement of the entire Base Radio 4 (ESD bracket overlaps by 1-2 mm).

Replacing an entire TSC or Base Radio 4 does not require the use of an ESD wrist strap, as both
boxes are ESD protected. However if any other service is required, the ESD bracket must be put
back at the right position and with the right screw to enable the effective use of the ESD wrist
strap.

2 Use of an ESD wrist strap and ESD earthing point

ESD wrist strap use is critical in the following cases.


• Replacement of any module inside a box. This includes service of any modules in a base
radio.
• Service of Receiver Multicoupler (RMC). The RMC is a relatively open mechanical
design and ESD protection is critical when servicing this module.

Special attention must be made to the cable that connects the (optional) CMU/duplexer tray RX
outputs to the Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) inputs of the RMC. The LNA is made with a GaAs
FET input, which by nature cannot be ESD protected. Never connect or disconnect this cable
without using a correctly earthed ESD wrist strap.
If The ESD bracket is removed in order to remove a complete FRU, attention must be paid to the
position of the ESD bracket when it is restored. Also, the point must be restored for wrist-strap
use.
It is important that the ESD bracket is not moved to another position where the caged nut and
screw is not of the type which makes electrical connection to the rack frame.

6866538D01-C 2-3
February 2005
Safety Precautions / Recommended Tools

Recommended Tools, Equipment,


and Parts
Tables 2-1 through 2-3 list the Tools, Test Equipment and locally procured parts that are required
for the installation procedure. The model numbers listed are recommended, but equivalent tools
and equipment made by other manufacturers are acceptable.

When selecting tools and equipment, always choose those which have insulated grips and
handles. This helps prevent potential injury resulting from electrical shock.

Recommended Tools
Table 2-1 lists the recommended tools for installation. These are not included as part of the EBTS
shipment and must be procured locally. All model numbers are Motorola part numbers, unless
noted otherwise. Equivalent items may be used, unless noted otherwise.

Table 2-1 Recommended Tools for Installation

Tool Model/Type Supplier Description

Banding cutter Locally Procured


Cable Crimp Tool TBM5 S Thomas & Betts Crimping lugs on power cables
Calculator Locally Procured
Cart, Two-wheeled 6680387A47 Motorola Transportation of tools and test
(luggage type) equipment
Circuit Cooler Spray 0180334B46 Motorola Low temperature alarm testing
Cellular tool kit RPX4286A Motorola Miscellaneous tools
Digital Level 60 cm (24") w/module Pro Smartlevel Antenna downtilt measurements
Driver Tools 2” hex to hex extension (2) Locally Procured
6” hex to hex extension (2)
T10 TORX bit (APEX)
Long T10 TORX bit
T15 TORX bit (APEX)
T20 TORX bit (APEX)
T25 TORX bit (APEX)
T30 TORX bit (APEX)
Electric Drill Locally Procured Drilling holes
Electric Screwdriver heavy duty Locally Procured Tightening screws/nuts
(only 1 required)
heavy duty (variable Locally Procured Tightening screws/nuts
speed)
light duty Locally Procured Tightening screws/nuts

2-4 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Safety Precautions / Recommended Tools

Table 2-1 Recommended Tools for Installation (continued)

Tool Model/Type Supplier Description

Flashlight, small Locally Procured


Hammer Drill Locally Procured Drilling concrete floor for
mounting studs
Heat Gun Locally Procured High temperature alarm testing
Hole Punch 1” Locally Procured Wiring 240 VAC to power
supply cabinet
Knife, utility Locally Procured
Markers (2) Locally Procured
Nut driver, 3/16” Locally Procured
Nut driver, 10 mm Locally Procured
Pliers Locally Procured
Pliers, connector Snap-on
Pliers, needle nose Locally Procured
Screw driver, torque 5 in-lbs Ind Pneumatic
hand tool
HILTI Gun Locally Procured Nail/fastener driving
Canvas lifting slings Locally Procured Lifting and moving the cabinet
Sack trolley Locally Procured Negotiating steps and curbs
10 m steel rule Locally Procured
1.0 m Spirit level Locally Procured
3 m extending ladder Locally Procured
Step ladder Locally Procured
2 sets of tower Locally Procured
climbing equipment
and safety harnesses
4 wheel cable Locally Procured
dispensing
bogie/trolley
Workmate with a Locally Procured
portable
metalworkers vice
Drives for torque 1/4” drive, 7/16” deep Ind Pneumatic
screw driver socket
1/4” drive, 5/16” deep
socket
1/4” drive, 3/16” socket
1/4” drive, 1” blade
screwdriver
1/4” hex to 1/4” hex drive

6866538D01-C 2-5
February 2005
Safety Precautions / Recommended Tools

Table 2-1 Recommended Tools for Installation (continued)

Tool Model/Type Supplier Description

Screw drivers #0 Phillips Locally Procured


#2 Phillips
3/16” blade
#1 blade
1/4” blade
Tarpaulin Approximately 8’ x 10’ Locally Procured Protecting equipment during
installation
Tie wrap gun Locally Procured
Tool box Locally Procured
Torque wrenches 6680388A27 Motorola Tightening battery lug nuts
5/16” breaking type, 5 in- Locally Procured For SMA connectors
lbs
Drives for 5/16” 6” extension, 3/8” drive Snap-on
torque wrench
1” deep 6 point socket,
3/8” drive
5/8” deep socket, 3/8” Ind Pneumatic
drive
9/16” deep socket, 3/8”
drive
1” deep socket, 3/8” drive
1/4” hex to 3/8” hex drive
TORX driver with Locally Procured
bits (handle storage)
Tweezers Locally Procured
Vacuum cleaner Locally Procured General clean-up
Wire cutters Locally Procured Cutting power cables
(#6 AWG to 250 MCM)
Wrenches, open end 3/8” Locally Procured
1-1/16”
Wrist strap Locally Procured

2-6 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Safety Precautions / Recommended Tools

Recommended Test Equipment


Table 2-2 lists the recommended test equipment for installation. These are not included as part of
the EBTS shipment and must be procured locally. All model numbers are Motorola part numbers,
unless noted otherwise.

Table 2-2 Recommended Test Equipment for Installation

Test Equipment Model/Type Supplier Description

Digital Multimeter Fluke 77 Fluke DC measurements


(only 1 required)
R1037A Motorola DC measurements
R1073A Motorola DC measurements
Milli-ohmmeter capable of Locally Procured
measuring < 1.0 Ω at 2.0 A
Megohmmeter capable of Locally Procured
measuring > 5.0 M Ω
Time Domain Locally Procured
Reflectometer (TDR)
Ground Resistance AEMC 3700 clamp- Locally Procured Measure for adequate ground
Ohmmeter on ground tester
Service Computer Locally Procured Local service terminal
Communication Cable 0102611X03 Motorola Pinouts from DB-9 to DB-9
Between PC Service must be straight through
Computer and EBTS Connects service computer to
Equipment DB-9 female on Site Controller
and BRC. Also provides pin 9
breakout connection.

Recommended Parts
Table 2-3 lists the recommended parts for installation. These are not included as part of the EBTS
shipment and must be procured locally. All model numbers are Motorola part numbers, unless
noted otherwise.

Table 2-3 Recommended Parts for Installation

Part Type/Size Supplier Where Used

Anchor Kit #02100-13 Hendry EBTS cabinet floor anchors


Bolts 3/8” x 16” x 3/4” Locally Procured Breaker panel on Power Supply rack
1/4” x 20” x 1/2” Locally Procured DC return bus, Power Supply rack
Coloured red, black, green, brown, Locally Procured Wire identification
Vinyl Tape yellow, and white
Grease anti-oxidant Locally Procured Battery terminal corrosion control
Lockwashers split - 3/8” Locally Procured Breaker panel, Power Supply rack
split - 1/4” Locally Procured DC return bus, Power Supply rack

6866538D01-C 2-7
February 2005
Safety Precautions / Recommended Tools

Table 2-3 Recommended Parts for Installation (continued)

Part Type/Size Supplier Where Used

Lugs 2 hole 1" centre various Locally Procured Battery connection; 3/8” bolt, 4/0 Cu
sizes
Lugs 2 hole 1" centre Locally Procured DC return connection; 1/4” bolt, #6 Cu
Power Cables 2
13.4 mm CSA (#6 AWG) Locally Procured Power supply wiring
stranded Cu (blue (or red)
and black)

111.3 mm2 CSA (4/0 Locally Procured Power supply wiring


AWG) stranded Cu (blue
(or red) and black)
Ground 33.7 mm2 CSA (#2 AWG) Locally Procured Cabinet grounding
Cables stranded Cu (green or
green-yellow)

13.4 mm2 CSA (#6 AWG) Locally Procured Cabinet grounding


stranded Cu (green or
green-yellow)

Table 2-4 lists the signal designations on the DB-9 connector for the service computer, located on
the Site Controller front panel, and the required breakout pins for external trigger signal access.

Table 2-4 “Service Access” DB-9 Connector Details

DB-9 Female Connector Pinout Function

1 not used
2 RxD
3 TxD
4 not used
5 GND
6 not used
7 not used
8 not used
9 not used

2-8 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Safety Precautions / Recommended Tools

Recommended Torque
Table 2-5 lists the recommended torque for RF Connectors, screws, nuts and bolts.

Table 2-5 Recommended Tools for Installation

Torque Torque
Item
Nm in-lb

“N” Coupling Nuts 3-4 26 - 35


“SMA” Coupling Nuts 0.78 - 1.13 6.9 - 10
M 3.5 Screw 1 - 1.5 8 - 13
M 6 Screw 4-7 35 - 62
M 6 Nut 6-7 53 - 62
M 10 Nut 7-8 62 - 70
Eye Bolts 10 - 13.5 88 - 119

6866538D01-C 2-9
February 2005
Safety Precautions / Recommended Tools

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

2 - 10 6866538D01-C
February 2005
3

3EBTS Interface Commands

MMI Commands
MMI commands are input from a service computer to the system RS-232 serial port (19200 bps,
8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity). Depending on the task, the RS-232 port is accessed from the Site
Controller, or from the front of each Base Radio Controller (BRC) in the Equipment Cabinet.
The service technician enters the MMI commands to communicate with the Site Controller at the
system level. The system response is returned to the service computer via RS-232.
Various test procedures use these commands to test and configure the system. The test procedure
for the Site Controller is in Chapter 6, “Configuration and Testing”.

Access Levels and Modes


The Site Controller and BR commands are available through the use of the password: motorola.
This password allows the service technician access to a subset of the MMI command set for field
service operations.
The motorola password is a default password that is programmed during manufacturing. The
password may be changed via the MMI.
The Site Controller has a configuration mode MMI which provides facilities for setup and testing.
The Dimetra IP Site Controller additionally has an MMI in application mode which provides local
diagnostic information.
Most of the BR commands are valid only while the BR is in the test mode. The configuration data
is temporarily stored in RAM until the BR is taken out of the test mode. Most MMI commands
do not allow the configuration data to be permanently stored in EEPROM, although a limited
number do. Commands that allow configuration data to be changed are noted.

6866538D01-C 3-1
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Conventions
The syntax for each command is presented as follows:
• plain text shows the actual text to be typed to invoke a command or action
• italic text shows where a parameter or value is to be substituted
• text enclosed in brackets [ ] indicates an optional value that may be entered
• where items are separated by vertical bars | , the items are the applicable choices that may
be entered
• text enclosed in braces { } indicates a corresponding selection or parameter that must be
entered for the command to execute
• a series of dots ... indicates one or more occurrences of a preceding parameter
• a pair of dots .. indicates a range of valid values
The syntax for the Site Controller and BR commands is case sensitive. Each example is shown in
the format that should be entered by the operator.
Some commands require the use of parameters. If input parameters are not entered, a response is
returned identifying the proper syntax for the command.
A definition describes in detail each command’s purpose and function. Where helpful, the
definition is followed by an example of the commands response. Typical values have been used
whenever possible.
Some commands return varying responses (such as available, not available, unknown, o.k., and
alarm). Only one of the possible responses is listed in each example.

3-2 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Site Controller Commands


The Site Controller commands consist of two groups: configuration and application. Both groups
are individually described below.
The Site Controller may be accessed simultaneously via the front panel Service Access port and
the rear panel SERIAL port.
Two access modes exist: unrestricted and restricted. In the restricted mode, a much reduced set of
commands are available. These are the commands that have no effect on Site Controller operation
(e.g., cls, dir, ver, help, logout).
If a user logs in to the Site Controller while another user is already logged in, the second user will
gain access, but in the restricted mode. Warning messages are displayed when a second user logs
in or logs out. Conversely, the evict command enables a user logged in under the restricted mode
to force the logout of the other user, thereby gaining unrestricted access rights. The evict command
is available only while logged in under the restricted mode.
The restricted and unrestricted modes can be differentiated by means of the prompt displayed. In
the unrestricted mode an upper-case prompt is displayed (SC>), while in the restricted mode a
lower-case prompt is displayed (sc>). Throughout this manual, it is assumed the user is logged in
with the unrestricted mode, thereby having unrestricted access rights.
The Dimetra IP software consists of a boot-up Configuration Mode software program and an
Application Mode software program.
The boot-up Configuration Mode software is responsible for:
- Boot-up and basic hardware configuration
- Allowing TSC and BRC config files to be loaded via TESS
- Providing MMI commands that support basic TSC configuration.
- Transferring control to the Application mode software. This normally occurs automatically
after a ten second wait for users to log-in to the Configuration Mode MMI.
The Application Mode software provides the functionality and features that support normal EBTS
networking operation.

6866538D01-C 3-3
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Site Controller Configuration Mode MMI Commands


The Site Controller Configuration Mode commands are as follows:

APM_CONFIG

Syntax:
apm_config [-brpos [11,12..etc] | -brReport [11,12..etc] -apm [1..3] | -? | -invalidate]
To configure the APM to BR Mapping. apm_config on its own reports the current mapping. The
default configuration will de-key all BRs on reception of a VSWR alarm

Options:
-brpos [11,12..etc] The BR position to mapped to an APM
-brReport [11,12..etc] The BR position that reports APM alarms
-apm [1..3] The APM number to map a BR to
-invalidate Warning!!!, Clears all mapping
-? Display help

Example:
This example assumes the following theoretical configuration. 3 BR system, BR1 and BR2
connected to APM 1, BR3 connected to APM2. BR1 reports APM1 alarms, BR2 reports APM2
alarms

apm_config -brpos 11 -apm1


apm_config -brpos 12 -apm 1
apm_config -brpos 13 -apm 2
apm_config -brReport 11 -apm 1
apm_config -brReport 12 -apm 2

To display the current configuration, use apm_config

apm_config
BR 11 -> APM 1
BR 12 -> APM 1
BR 13 -> APM 2
BR 11 Reports APM 1 Alarm
BR 12 Reports APM 2 Alarm

3-4 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

ATTRIB

Syntax:
Syntax1: attrib {-c | -n | -cn | -f | -fClear} | -nClear} file...
Syntax2: attrib {-install | -remove | -passed | -failed} [file...]
Syntax3: attrib [-v verStr] [-d dateStr] component ...
Syntax4: attrib [ -update ] [component ...]
The attrib command displays or edits information associated with hardware and file components
within the TSC.

Attribute Bit Values:

Bit Summary Description

r Readable File exists

w Writable File does not exist

a Archive File has been modified

n Next File will be used next after reset

c Current File is currently being used

f Fallback File will be used next if site fails

Common Options:

-c Sets file(s) to be used as current now

-n Sets file(s) to be used as next after reset. Valid file must exist

-cn Sets file(s) to be used as current and next. Valid file must exist

-f Sets file(s) to be used as fallback if next fails

-fClear Clears the fallback bit (if set) for the specified file(s)

-nClear Clears the next bit (if set) for the specified file(s)

-passed Sets file(s) as passed, i.e. working. If any fallback has been set, then this will
clear it

-failed Sets file(s) as failed, i.e. faulty. If any fallback has been set, then this will select
it to be used next and clear the fallback

file Specifies file to set. If no file is given, then used all current files

-v Sets component(s) version string

-d Sets component(s) upgraded date

6866538D01-C 3-5
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Other Options:

-install Sets a file as valid

-remove Sets a file as invalid. Clears the date and version string

-update Update date and readable flag data from hardware and filing system

Options at any time and any syntax:

-all Display current versions as well

-bare Does not page information or display the header text

-verboseOff Turn display of SWDL errors/information off

-verboseErrors Turn display of SWDL errors only on

-verboseAll Turn display of SWDL errors and information on

General Parameters:

verStr Version label for the component

dateStr The upgraded date string (hh:mm:ss) for the component

component Specifies the component to set/display

Example:
attrib Displays all attributes
attrib tsc.code.1 brc.code.1 Displays the attributes of
brc.code.1 and tsc.code.1
attrib -c tsc.code.1 brc.code.1 Sets the brc.code.1 and
tsc.code.1 to be used now
attrib -v R03.01.00 tsc.code.1 Sets the version of tsc.code.

CLS

Syntax:
cls
The cls command causes a VT100 clear screen escape sequence followed by a cursor location (top
left) command to be sent to the console screen.

DELOOP

Syntax:
deloop
The deloop command takes the site link E1 out of loop back mode.

3-6 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

DIR

Syntax:
dir [-all]
The dir command lists the current contents of the Site Controller file system. By default, only
valid files are listed.

Options:
-all Display all files even if invalid.

EVICT

Syntax:
evict
The evict command enables a user logged in under the restricted mode to force the logout of the
other user, thereby gaining unrestricted access rights. The evict command is available (and
displayed by the help command) only while logged in under the restricted mode.

FORCE_ACTIVE

Syntax:
force_active
The force_active command is only applicable in an EBTS with a dual site controller
configuration and allows the user to force a redundant site controller to become active. It is
important to note that the site controller will become active even if the other site controller is
active and in a trunking state. This command is not available on System Releases that do not
support the redundant TSC.

HELP

Syntax:
help
The help command displays a list of all available commands and a short synopsis of their use,
comprising an option list and a brief description.

All commands support a ‘-?’ option which displays a description of that command and its usage,
including a brief description of each parameter.

6866538D01-C 3-7
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

ID

Syntax:
id [A|B]
The id command enables the user to set or display the position identity of the site controller. This
command is not available on System Releases that do not support the redundant TSC.

Options:
A|B set position identity to either A or B.

LOGOUT

Syntax:
logout
The logout command logs out a user and returns to the “Username: “ prompt on the MMI.

LOOP
Syntax (Sitelink setting = E1):
loop [-line | -payload | -local -test [ -s bytes] [ -max | -i iter]]
The loop command performs a loopback test, on the currently selected site link interface E1.
Depending on the sitelink command setting to E1 the command has the following set of options.

Options:
-line Start an E1 Line (whole interface) remote loop 1, 2)
-payload Start an E1 Payload (Data Timeslot) remote loop 1, 2)
-local Start an E1 Loopback internal to the TSC 1)
-test -HDLC3) Perform an HDLC loopback test with a number of packets similar in
size to a voice packet
-i iter Overrides the default number of iterations (100).
-max Run the link at maximum rate until a key is pressed on the console
-s bytes Set the size of the test data packets (from 10 to 1534 bytes).
1)
Use the deloop command to terminate any loops or tests started with this command.
2)
Cannot run an HDLC test with this loop type. If no loopback is specified, an external loop is assumed.
3) Default setting if not specified.

3-8 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

MODEM

Syntax:
modem [-port] [-baud baud] AT_command
The modem command allows an AT command to be sent to a modem connected to the specific
serial port.
It is possible to use this command to set up and store a modem profile, but there is no confirmation
to the user that the modem has accepted the commands.
If a user is logged into the modem port, then the AT command will not be sent (along with a
possible change in baud rate) until the user has logged out.

Options:
-1 | -2 Select between serial port 1 or serial port 2. NB Port 1 is the front
panel Service Access MMI port. If no port number is specified, then
the port from which the command was entered will be used.
--baud baud Select baud rate for modem. This baud rate will be retained at power-up.
-AT_command Specifies the AT command and should include the “AT” prefix.

MONITOR

Syntax:
monitor [ -none | -5mhz | -ext | -gps]
The monitor command configures the Site Controller’s monitor port to provide the desired
output. With no options, the current setting is displayed.

Options:
-none Switches off the monitor port
-5mhz 5 MHz clock
-ext External 1 PPS signal
-gps GPS 1 PPS signal

PAGE_SIZE

Syntax:
page_size [lines]
The page_size command either reports or configures the auto-scrolling MMI page length.

6866538D01-C 3-9
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Options:
lines A decimal number representing the number of lines printed to the
screen before the user is prompted to continue. If set to 0 the display
is continuous.

PASSWORD

Syntax:
password
Upon entry of the password command, the user will be prompted to enter the existing password.
A correct entry will result in a request for the new password, and the presentation of the restriction
to which it must conform. If the entry is valid, the user will be prompted to re-enter the new
password.
A message will then be displayed informing the user whether a change has been made. The
command will change the appropriate password according to the newly entered password.

PBR

Syntax:
pbr address | -all
The pbr (“ping base radio”) command causes a message to be transmitted via Ethernet to the
specified Medium Access Control (MAC) address. The Site Controller will display an appropriate
success or failure message.

Options:
address MAC address in the format xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx where x is a
hexadecimal digit.
-all Sends a broadcast ping to all BRs.

The MAC address can be obtained from a BR by using the BR MMI command get enet_id.

PING

Syntax:
ping [-n pkts_to_send] [-l data_size] [ip_address]
The ping command enables the user to send an ICMP ping message to be sent to the specified IP
address over a connected IP network. This command is not available on System Releases that do
not support the redundant TSC.
If the IP address is not specified the help text will be dispalyed. If -n is not specified it will use
the default, as specified in the options text for -n.

3 - 10 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Options:
-n pkts_to_send number of packets to send, defaulted to 4. For a continuous ping set
to 0, and then any key press will stop the continuous ping.
-l data_size byte size of the ping message packets, defaulted to 32.
-ip_address standard 'dot' format.

RECEIVE

Syntax:
receive
The receive command loads files over the Site Controller’s console serial port into non-volatile
storage. File names are supplied by the sender via the zmodem protocol.

RESET

Syntax:
reset
The reset command causes the Site Controller to perform a hardware reset, which is roughly
equivalent to pressing the front panel RESET button.

RUN

Syntax:
run
The run command leaves configuration mode and causes the Site Controller to continue with
normal system operation. In general this means that the Site Controller will then proceed to load
and run the main application program.

SEND

Syntax:
send filename...
The send command transfers files from the Site Controller via the console serial port. The files
are transferred using the Zmodem protocol. A typical use would be for uploading configuration
data files.

6866538D01-C 3 - 11
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

SITELINK

Syntax:
sitelink [-x21 | -e1 | -?]
This will allow the selection of X.21 or E1 site link interface type. The X.21 site link will always
be the default unless changed via this command. sitelink on its own will return the current
configuration. When -e1 option is selected the text for the e1config command will be displayed

Options:
-x21 Select X.21 site link interface
-e1 Select E1 site link interface
-? Display help

Example:
sitelink -e1

STATUS

Syntax:
status [-c]
The status command displays status and configuration information relating to the TSC. With no
options, the TSC status (BSL looped or direct, date/time of last boot, current internal temperature
etc) is displayed.

Options:
-c Show configuration parameters. These will include appropriate
parameters from the Configuration Mode software’s areas of NVRAM.

TEST

Syntax:
test [-all | -bsl | -eas | -eth | -ffs | -led | -sri]
The test command tests the peripheral inside or related to the Site Controller. With no options,
the status of each device is reported until a device is found to have failed, at which point the
reporting is aborted.

Options:
-all This performs all tests as for the command with no parameters but in
the event of a failure, reporting will continue.

3 - 12 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

-bsl This option reports the results of the currently selected site link (E1
or X.21) driver initialisation.
-eas This option tests connectivity with the EAS. The EAS LEDs are
turned on (then off) and status of the alarm input buffers is displayed.
-eth This option reports the result of the Ethernet device driver
initialisation.
-ffs This option reports the result of the flash memory initialisation.
-led Perform front panel LED tests (active and power-on LEDs
excluded).
-sri This option reports the result of the site reference device driver
initialisation.

TIMEZONE

Syntax:
timezone [ [+|-] {0..14}:{00 | 30}]
The timezone command sets the Site Controller timezone relative to Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).

VER

Syntax:
ver [-all | -h]
The ver command displays Site Controller version information. With no options, the copyright
banner is displayed.

Options:
-all Displays both hardware and software version information.
-h Displays versions of hardware within the Site Controller.

6866538D01-C 3 - 13
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Site Controller Application Mode MMI Commands


The Site Controller Application Mode commands are as follows. With the ’-?’ option a command
displays a description of that command and its usage.
The # character can be used with any of the Application Mode commands to introduce a comment
on the command line. The # character and any text following it are ignored.

ARP

Syntax:
arp
The arp command displays the current ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) lookup table
maintained internally by the IP protocol stack in the Site Controller. This table shows the Site
Controller's mapping of MAC addresses to IP addresses of the devices connected to it.

ATTRIB
Syntax:
Syntax1: attrib [-bare] [-n | -a | -aClear] [<file1> [<file2> ...]]
Syntax2: attrib [-bare] [-v <verStr>] [-d <dateStr>] [<comp1> [<comp2> ...]]
Syntax3: attrib [-bare] [-update] [-dump] [<comp1> [<comp2> ...]]
The attrib command displays or edits information associated with hardware and file components
within the Site Controller.

Attribute Bit Values


Bit Summary Description

r Readable File exists


w Writable File does not exist
a Archive File has been modified
n Next File will be used next after reset
c Current File is currently being used
f Fallback File will be used next if site fails

Options
-a Set file archive flag
-aClear Clear file archive flag
-all Display all versions including log files, etc.
-bare Suppress display of heading, paging and results
-d Set component upgraded date and time

3 - 14 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Options (continued)
-dump Display as commands to paste/re-enter
-n Set file to used as next after reset
-update Update component data automatically
-v Set version label of component (no spaces allowed)
-a Set file archive flag

Parameters
file Specify file to set. If no file is given, then uses all current files

comp Specify the component to set or display.

dateStr The upgraded date string (<dd/mm/yyyy> <hh:mm:ss>) for the component

verStr Version label for the component

Valid for System Releases prior to D5.2:

The operation of this command in Application Mode is identical to the operation when in
Configuration Mode with the exception that attrib -cn will only set the next attribute NOT current
and next as IN THE CONFIGURATION MODE. See page 3-5.

AUDIOSTAT

Syntax:
audiostat [-br br_number | -src source_type | -call call_type | -tsa timeslot_assignment]
audiostat -a
audiostat -r
audiostat -f [-br br_number | -call call_type | -src source_type | -tsa timeslot_assignment]
After a voice call is ended, statistical information on audio parameters during the call is gathered
by the EBTS. The audiostat command will display those statistics on a per call basis for the most
recent calls. The calls are displayed in a chronological order: the most recent is displayed last.

Options:
-br br_number Only the statistics for the calls established on the BR specified by
br_number are displayed. br_number consists of the BR cabinet and
position entered directly next to each other without any separating
spaces, so a BR in cabinet 1 position 1 would be specified with the
number 11.
-src source_type Only the statistics for the calls sourced by a source of the type
specified by source_type are displayed. source_type can take the
following values:
0 Synchronised base radio
33 Unsynchronised SwMI vocoder without JDA

6866538D01-C 3 - 15
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

37 Unsynchronised site controller


-call call_type Only the statistics for the calls of the type specified by call_type are
displayed. call_type can take the following values:
0 Console (Individual)
1 Console (Group)
2 Console (Group Re-group)
3 Telephone Interconnect

The call type field is valid only if the source type is unsynchronised SwMI vocoder without JDA.

-tsa timeslot_assignment
Only the statistics of the calls that have used traffic channels with the
timeslots specified by timeslot_assignment are displayed.
timeslot_assignment is used as a four-bit bitmap and several
timeslots can be selected. For example a value of 5 for
timeslot_assignment will specify time slots 1 and 3 (5 = 0101 in
binary.)
-a Rather than display all audio statistics for each calls, the average
value as well as the minimum and the maximum values for a subset
of these statistics are displayed.
-r The values displayed by option -a are reset to zero.
-f Allow filtering of the calls that will be taken into account for the
computation of the values displayed by option a. Use options -br,
-src, -call and -tsa to set the filters. Alone this option disable filters
that might have been previously set.

The values computed prior to calling this command are reset to zero.

BTS_TYPE
Syntax:
bts_type
The bts_type command displays the type of Base Transceiver Station, i.e. EBTS or MBTS.

This command is not available on System Releases prior to D5.2.

BRLOCK

Syntax:
brlock
brlock -status br_number
brlock -clear br_number

3 - 16 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

brlock -clearall
Following a VSWR alarm all BRs are locked. The brlock command allows the service personnel
to ascertain the lock status of BRs and unlock individual BRs. brlock -clear br_number clears
the lock from an individual br; brlock -clearall clears the lock from all brs; brlock -status
br_number returns the lock status for an individual br.

CLS

Syntax:
cls
The cls command causes a VT100 clear screen escape sequence followed by a cursor location (top
left) command to be sent to the console screen.

CRASHDUMP
Syntax:
crashdump [<id>]
The crashdump command is used to display the diagnostic information which is captured
automatically in the event of some TSC application crashes. If invoked with no arguments,
crashdump gives a list of crashes for which the information is available, showing a numeric ID,
date/time, and reason for each. If the crashdump command is run with the ID of one of the crash
records as an argument, the full diagnostic information recorded for that crash is displayed.

This command is not available on System Releases prior to D5.2.

DIAG

Syntax:
diag
The diag command allows access to the Site Controller’s internal diagnostic information.
An on-screen menu allows selection of the following information:
1 Display menu
2 Call allocation table
3 Affiliation database
4 Call logging
5 Volatile event logging
6 Fault/event logging
7 Alarm logging
8 Major event logging
9 User log-ins

6866538D01-C 3 - 17
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

10 BRC SNMP trace


11 Reset log
12 Route logs to display (Release D5.2 and later)
13 Route no logs to display (Release D5.2 and later)
0 Exit DIAG mode

DIR

Syntax:
dir [-all]
The dir command lists the current contents of the Site Controller file system. By default, only
valid files are listed.

Options:
-all Display all files even if file is invalid.

DISPLAY CONFIG

Syntax:
display config [-quick | -ip]
The display config command display the current configuration data of the Site Controller. By
default, this command displays all of the configurable parameters set in the configuration data file
downloaded from the BTS Service Software. Options are provided to allow useful subsets of this
information to be displayed.

Options:
-ip Display all IP addresses and port settings.
-quick Display site and zone ID, adjacencies, LST enabled flag, GPS status,
and all address ranges.

The options are only available on System Releases D5.1 SER, D5.2 SER, and later.

EAS_OUT
Syntax:
eas_out [<n>|<n> on|<n> off]
The eas_out command is used to query or control the state of EAS output relays. Invoking the
command with no arguments displays the configured functionality and state of all outputs. With
a single argument (the output number), further detail about the last state change of the specified
output is displayed.

3 - 18 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

To control an output’s state, both the output number and the required state (on or off) are specified
as arguments.

This command can only be used to control the state of EAS outputs which are configured for
manual control. These can be identified by running eas_out with no arguments. The eas_out
command is only available on the EBTS platform (not MBTS).

This command is not available on System Releases prior to D5.2.

EVICT

Syntax:
evict
The evict command enables a user logged in under the restricted mode to force the logout of the
other user, thereby gaining unrestricted access rights. The evict command is available (and
displayed by the help command) only while logged in under the restricted mode.

EXIT
Syntax:
exit
This command is used to log out the user and terminate the MMI. If the user was logged in via
telnet, the connection is dropped.

This command is not available on System Releases prior to D5.2.

HELP

Syntax:
help
The help command displays a list of all available commands and a short synopsis of their use,
comprising an option list and a brief description.

All commands support a ‘-?’ option which displays a description of that command and its usage,
including a brief description of each parameter.

ID
The operation of the id command in the application mode is identical to the operation when in
configuration mode. This command is not available on System Releases that do not support the
redundant TSC.

6866538D01-C 3 - 19
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

KILL
Syntax:
kill <Console ID>
Disconnects the specified console, logging the user out first. The console ID can be found by
using the who command, and must not specify the current console (the logout or exit commands
can be used to terminate the current session).

This command is not available on System Releases prior to D5.2.

KVL

Syntax:
kvl
The kvl command entered via the front serial port of the Site Controller configures the front port
for communication with the Key Variable Loader device. If no valid KVL communication is
received within 60 seconds, then the port returns to normal operation. Since the front serial port
is normally used by the MMI, no MMI commands may be entered via this port until the
communication with the Key Variable Loader device has been terminated.The success of this
operation is indicated at the Key Variable Loader device only. Following termination of
communication by the KVL, the front serial port will automatically return to normal MMI mode.

LOCK

Syntax:
lock
The lock command places the EBTS into the locked state. While in the locked state, the BRs are
prevented from keying. The MMI will wait while the Site Controller performs the operation
before returning to the user. The call processing operation will be shut down gracefully when a
lock command is issued.

LOG
Syntax:
log [-inform | -minor | -major | -fatal] <string>
The log command saves the specified string into one of the TSC’s log files. The string may be up
to approximately 80 characters in length, and will be converted to lower case before being saved.
If no option is specified, the minor (Fault/Event) log will be used by default.

The # character is the MMI comment character. If this character is used in the string, then any
text following it will be discarded.

3 - 20 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Options:
-inform Saves string to the information (Volatile) log
-minor Saves string to the minor (Fault/Event) log
-major Saves string to the major (Major Event) log
-fatal Saves string to the fatal (Major Event) log

This command is not available on System Releases prior to D5.2.

LOGOUT

Syntax:
logout
The logout command logs out a user and returns to the “Username: “ prompt on the MMI.

MONITOR

Syntax:
monitor [ -none | -5mhz | -ext | -gps]
The monitor command configures the Site Controller’s monitor port to provide the desired
output. With no options, the current setting is displayed.

Options:
-none Switches off the monitor port.
-5mhz 5 MHz clock.
-ext External 1 PPS signal.
-gps GPS 1 PPS signal.

NETSTAT

Syntax:
netstat [-s]
The netstat command displays the current active TCP/IP connections to the Site Controller and
the current active UDP ports.

Options:
-s Display the current statistics associated with the IP, TCP, UDP and
ICMP protocols.

6866538D01-C 3 - 21
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

PAGE_SIZE

Syntax:
The operation of the page_size command in the Application Mode is identical to the operation in
the Configuration Mode. See page 3-9.

PASSWORD

Syntax:
password
Upon entry of the password command, the user will be prompted to enter the existing password.
A correct entry will result in a request for the new password, and the presentation of the restriction
to which it must conform. If the entry is valid, the user will be prompted to re-enter the new
password.
A message will then be displayed informing the user whether a change has been made. The
command will change the appropriate password according to the current access mode.

PING
The operation of the ping command in the application mode is identical to the operation when in
configuration mode. This command is not available on System Releases that do not support the
redundant TSC.

RECEIVE
The operation of this command in Application Mode is identical to the operation when in
Configuration Mode.

RESET

Syntax:
reset [-ebts | -peer | -br br_num]
The reset command command when used without any options causes the Site Controller to
perform a hardware reset, which is roughly equivalent to pressing the front panel RESET button.
In a dual TSC EBTS reset of the active TSC will cause the standby TSC to take over.

Options:
-ebts Causes the BRs to be reset as well as the Site Controller.
-peer Enables the user to perform a hardware reset on the other site
controller. This option is only applicable for an EBTS with a dual
site controller configuration. This command option is not available
on System Releases that do not support the redundant TSC.

3 - 22 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

-br br_num Reset the BR specified by br_num (1..7). This command option is
not available on System Releases that do not support the redundant
TSC.

RGPS_DELAY

Syntax:
rgps_delay [-set <delay> | -invalidate]
The rgps_delay command sets the transmission time delay for the cable connecting the RGPS
(Remote GPS) receiver to the Site Controller. The time delay is only to be set when a
independently powered RGPS receiver is being used. By setting a time delay the Site Controller
assumes that a independently powered RGPS is present.

Options:
-set Set the transmission time delay to the entered value. Must be entered
in nanoseconds.
-invalidate This command invalidates the transmission time delay value.

This command is not available on System Releases that do not support the use of a remote GPS
antenna.

SEND
The operation of this command in Application Mode is identical to the operation when in
Configuration Mode.

SITE_LOCATION

Syntax:
site_location
site_location {-reset | -valid}
site_location -co_ordinates [N | S] deg: min: sec [W | E] deg: min: sec H metres
This command allows resetting, setting and checking of the site location. The system needs to
determine its location in order to synchronize its timing with other sites.

When a remote GPS is used, the position information is relevant to the remote GPS and not to the
EBTS.

6866538D01-C 3 - 23
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Options:
-reset Clears any site location information from permanent memory. The
Site Controller will perform GPS site survey when it is next
restarted.
-valid Determine if a valid site location has been stored in permanent
memory.
-co_ordinates Sets the lattitude, longitude and height co-ordinates for the site
location.

If the TSC is moved, the site_location -reset command must be entered immediately after first
power up to allow the system to calculate its new location.

Example:
site_location Determine location of site
site_location -reset Clear any stored site location
site_location -valid Determine if site location valid
site_location N54:12:45.789 W1:6:12.345 H174 Set the site location

The system must be restarted for these commands to have any effect.

STATUS BR

Syntax:
status br [cabinet | position]
The status br command returns information relating to a single BR or all BRs. If entered without
cabinet and position parameters, the command causes the information for all BRs to be displayed
in a table.
If no response is received from a BR, then the entries in the table are made with a series of dashes.

Options:
cabinet The cabinet in which the BR is physically located.
position The position of the specified BR within the cabinet.

The cabinet and position parameters must be entered directly next to each other without any
separating spaces, so a BR in cabinet 1 position 1 would be checked with the command “status
br 11”.

3 - 24 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

STATUS BSL

Syntax:
status bsl
The status bsl command will display the current status of the base site link, including the results
of any tests performed.

STATUS BSLQ
Syntax:
status bslq [-r]
The status bslq command displays the statistics for the transmission queues associated with the
X.21 interface.
-r Resets the statistics for the X.21 transmission queues.

STATUS BTS
Syntax:
status bts [-l]
The status bts command displays state information for various EBTS subsystems.

Options:
-l Long output format. In addition to the state, the associated probable
cause and time of last state change trap are displayed or each
subsystem.

The status bts command is only available on the EBTS platform (not MBTS).

This command is not available on System Releases prior to D5.2.

STATUS CRTP

Syntax:
status crtp [-r]
The status crtp command displays the current CRTP (Compressed Real Time Protocol) statistics.

Options:
-r Resets these CRTP statistics

6866538D01-C 3 - 25
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

STATUS EAS

Syntax:
status eas [ -Pn | -all | -m ]
The status eas command displays the status of all the alarm contacts of the EAS. Status results
are displayed in a table.
The table contains input/output number, a textual description, and a status (o.k./alarm for inputs and
active/inactive for outputs). The inputs and outputs are displayed in separate sections in the table.

Options:
-Pn This option gets the status of the plug number entered (where n is the
EAS rear panel plug (connector) number 5 to 10).
-all This option shows all inputs (including disabled inputs).
-m This option starts continuous status monitoring.

STATUS FR

Syntax:
status fr [-r]
The status fr command displays the current statistics associated with the frame relay protocol
layer.

Options:
-r Resets these frame relay statistics

STATUS FRF

Syntax:
status frf [-r]
The status frf command displays the current statistics associated with frame relay fragmentations
and reassembly.

Options:
-r Resets the frame relay fragmentation statistics

3 - 26 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

STATUS KEYS
Syntax:
status keys
The status keys command displays the security key status information.

STATUS LMI

Syntax:
status lmi [-r]
The status lmi command displays the current LMI (Local Management Interface) statistics. The
LMI protocol monitors the PVCs (Permanent Virtual Circuit) that link the Site Controller to the
Core Routers.

Options:
-r Resets these LMI statistics

STATUS PEER

Syntax:
status peer
The status peer command displays information on the other site controller's current functional
status and its identity position. A valid id will only be displayed if the peer TSC is responding
and correctly configured. The command is only applicable for an EBTS with a dual site controller
configuration. This command is not available on System Releases that do not support the
redundant TSC.

STATUS RIGMP

Syntax:
status rigmp [-r]
The status rigmp command displays the current statistics associated with robust IGMP (Internet
Group Membership Protocol).

Options:
-r resets these robust IGMP statistics

6866538D01-C 3 - 27
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

STATUS SC

Syntax:
status sc [-all]
The status sc command displays preliminary diagnostics information on the TSC. This includes
the health of the TSC, the trunking state, the internal state and the site link status.

Options:
-all Displays the internal state of the cell and BRs.

STATUS SEC
Syntax:
status sec
The status sec command displays security parameters used by the Site Controller.

STATUS SRI

Syntax:
status sri [-gps | -sr | -t | -stat_show | -stat_reset | -p]
The status sri command provides general information on the health of the Site Reference system.
This includes the Site Reference and GPS operational status, UTC, GPS and local times and 1PPS
signal status.

Options:
-gps Displays detailed status of the GPS receiver including a satellite
tracking report. (Release D5.2 and later)
-sr Provides details of the site reference internal state status sri [-all | -t
| -p | -stat_show | -stat_reset] (Release D5.2 and later)
-t Displays GPS receiver identifier.
-p Displays continuously updated satellite tracking information.
-stat_show Display GPS statistics.
-stat_reset Reset GPS statistics.

When a remote GPS is used, the position information is relevant to the remote GPS and not to the
EBTS

TFTP
Syntax:
tftp <host_ip> {get|put} [-d <host_dir>] {-a[lltsclogs] | [file1 ...]}

3 - 28 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

The tftp command allows files to be uploaded to or downloaded from a remote computer. The
remote host whose IP address is specified by host_ip must be running TFTP server software.

Options:
-d Specifies the source or destination directory on the host machine.
The directory name must end with a “/” or “\” character.
-a For a put operation, indicates that all TSC log files should be sent.

This command is not available on System Releases prior to D5.2.

UNLOCK

Syntax:
unlock
The unlock command places the Site Controller into the unlocked state from the current state.

VER

Syntax:
ver [-h]
The ver command displays version information for Site Controller software and, optionally, the
Site Controller hardware. If entered without options, the firmware and application version
numbers are displayed.

Options:
-h Displays both hardware and software information.

WHO
Syntax:
who
This command displays a list of users logged in or connected to the TSC. The information
displayed includes the user name, port, and access mode. If the user name field is blank, then a
telnet connection exists but no user is logged in over it.
If a user is logged into a Base Radio, then the user name is displayed as “Unknown”.

This command is not available on System Releases prior to D5.2.

6866538D01-C 3 - 29
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Base Radio Commands


The BR command set is used to configure and test the Base Radio.
All MMI commands can be divided into three groups:
a) Configuration MMI specific commands:
get ex_threshold
get reset_info
get rssi
get rx_mode
get rx_status
get tetra_format
get txdc_i
get txdc_q
get txiq_ph
set ex_threshold
set rx_qsign
set tetra_format
set tone
set txdc_i_final
set txdc_q_final
set tx_test_mode
b) Application MMI specific commands:
cls
exit
get active_traces
get aiea
get air_tracer [xxxx]
get ccimmun
get config
get info
get pa_status
kvl
set ddk
set traces_off
set rear_serial
statistics
c) All remaining commands are common Configuration (ROM) and Application MMI
commands.

3 - 30 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Base Radio Configuration and Application Mode Commands

AIEA
Syntax:
aiea
This aiea command returns the Air interface Encryption and Authentication configuration.

Works only with Application Software.

Example:
BRC> aiea
ZONE ID : 1
SITE ID : 1
CK change : 65535 seconds notification period
SC change : 65535 seconds notification period
DCK DB : download not onging
DCK DB : overflow flag clear
SC1 : supported
SC2 : disabled
SC3 : disabled
AUTH : not required
SC1MS : supported (ignored)
Registr. : clear (ignored)
Broadcast : clear (ignored)
KSG : TEA1
START Addr: 0x0d0000 851968
END Addr: 0xafffff 11534335
KEK1 : undefined
KEK2 : undefined
SCK1 : undefined
SCK2 : undefined
CCK1 : undefined
CCK2 : undefined
SCK : undefined
CCK : undefined
DL-SC : 1
DL-CK : undefined
DL-KSG : no TEA
UL-SC : 1
UL-CK : undefined
UL-KSG : no TEA

6866538D01-C 3 - 31
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

AIR_TRACER
Syntax:
air_tracer | at [xxxx]
The rear Base Radio serial port can be used to monitor the air interface. It has to be configured
for diagnostics (see set rear_ser).
Data is available from the rear serial port for all slots with a channel set-up. Additionally data is
available for slots that are configured via the air_tracer command.
The data is available in clear or encrypted format (see air_tracer_mode for details).

Works only with Application Software.

Example:

BRC> air_tracer

usage: air_tracer | at [xxxx]


xxxx is the config for the TMV/air tracer for slot 1..4
0 : air tracer disabled for this slot
1 : air tracer enabled for this slot
Examples:
"at 0100" enables air trace for slot 2
"at 111" invalid, always provide 4 parameters
"at 11 11"invalid, no spaces in parameter string allowe
CAUTION: Enabling traces impairs BRC performance,
disable for normal operation!
NOTE: see "atm" to enable encrypted TMV output

current air tracer configuration (for help type "at"):


slot 1 2 3 4
0 0 0 0

By default the Air Tracer output is disabled, the rear serial port is busy (in autotune mode). Use
set rear_ser diagnostic command to change the port mode to diagnostic mode.

3 - 32 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

AIR_TRACER_MODE
Syntax:
air_tracer_mode [xxxx]
The air_tracer_mode command sets the Mode of the TMV output to clear, encrypted or both.

Works only with Application Software.

Example:
a) Querying the current air tracer setting

BRC> air_tracer_mode

usage: air_tracer_mode | atm [xxxx]


xxxx is the config for the TMV/air tracer for slot 1..4
C : clear air tracer selected for this slot
E : encrypted air tracer selected for this slot
B : clear AND encrypted air tracer selected for this slot
Examples:
"atm EECC" encrypted slote 1 and 2, clear slot 3 and 4
"atm BEC" invalid, always provide 4 parameters
"atm BE CC"invalid, no spaces in parameter string allowed
CAUTION: This does not enable the traces. See "at" and
"set rear_ser diagnostic" command to enable traces.

current air tracer modes are (for help type "atm"):


slot 1 2 3 4
C C C C

b) Setting new air tracer mode


BRC> air_tracer_mode ecec

current air tracer modes are (for help type "atm"):


slot 1 2 3 4
E C E C

ATC CAV_PARK
Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc cav_park cavity
The atc cav_park command instructs the Autotuner to park the specified cavity.

6866538D01-C 3 - 33
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Example:
BRC> atc cav_park 1
Command executed OK

ATC CHECK
Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc check
The atc check command tests the LGP ATCC firmware.

Example:
BRC> atc check
Command executed OK

ATC GET CAV_FREQ


Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc get cav_freq cavity
The atc get cav_freq command displays the frequency that the specified cavity is tuned to. If the
cavity frequency has not been established, a value of zero is displayed.

Example:
BRC> atc get cav_freq 1
Cavity 1
Cavity Freq. 932000000 Hz
Cavity Status 1a - Tuned, Present, RF, No Alarm

ATC GET CAV_INP_POWER


Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc get cav_inp_power cavity
The atc get cav_inp_power command displays the input power for the specified cavity in dBm.

3 - 34 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Example:
BRC> atc get cav__inp_power 1
Cavity 1
Input Power 37.68 dBm
Cavity Status 1a- Tuned, Present, RF, No Alarm

ATC GET CAV_REFL_POWER


Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc get cav_refl_power cavity
The atc get cav_refl_power command displays the reflected power for the specified cavity in
dBm.

Example:
BRC> atc get cav_refl_power 1
Cavity 1
Reflected Power 20.12 dBm
Cavity Status 1a- Tuned, Present, RF, No Alarm

ATC GET CAV_STATUS


Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc get cav_status cavity
The atc get cav_status command displays the full status for the given cavity. The Frequency,
Input Power, Reflected Power, VSWR, Alarm Status Flags and Cavity Status Flags are displayed.

Example:
BRC> atc get cav_status 1
Cavity 1
Cavity Freq. 937000000 Hz
Input Power 37.68 dBm
Reflected Power 20.12 dBm
VSWR Ratio 2.15
Alarm Status 00 -
Cavity Status 1a- Tuned, Present, RF, No Alarm

6866538D01-C 3 - 35
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

ATC GET CAV_VSWR


Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc get cav_vswr cavity
The atc get cav_vswr command displays the VSWR ratio for the specified cavity.

Example:
BRC> atc get cav_vswr 2
Cavity 2
VSWR Ratio 2.15
Cavity Status 1a - Tuned, Present, RF, No Alarm

ATC GET CAV_VSWR_ALM


Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc get cav_vswr_alm cavity
The atc get cav_vswr_alm command displays the VSWR alarm threshold for the given cavity.

Example:
BRC> atc get cav_vswr_alm 2
Cavity 2
VSWR Threshold 02.80
Cavity Status 1a - Tuned, Present, RF, No Alarm

ATC GET CHAN_SPC


Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc get chan_spc
The atc get chan_spc command displays the cavity channel spacing in kHz.

Example:

BRC> atc get spc


Chan Spacing 150 kHz

3 - 36 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

ATC GET COMBINER


Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc get combiner
The atc get combiner command displays which type of ATCC is connected to the BRC.

Example:
BRC> atc get combiner
LGP Combiner detected

ATC GET FWARE_REV


Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc get fware_rev
The atc get fware_rev command displays the Autotuner Firmware Revision Number, the
Attached Cavity Count and a Product ID code.

Example:
BRC> atc get fware_rev
Firmware Revision 12.34
Cavity Count 3
Product ID 0x01

ATC GET TUNE_TIMO


Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc get tune_timo
The atc get tune_timo command displays the ATCC tune timeout.

Example:
BRC> atc get tune_timo
Tune Timeout0 mins

6866538D01-C 3 - 37
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

ATC HELP
Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc [help | ?]
atc get [help | ?]
atc set [help | ?]
This is an example of the Autotuner general "Help" facility. It displays all possible sub-
commands following the atc command.

Example:
BRC> atc help
auto|atc HELP
Autotuner sub-commands :-
set Set
get Get
sanity Sanity check
reset Reset
cav_park Park cavity

ATC RESET
Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc reset
The atc reset command performs a warm reset of the Autotuner.

Example:
BRC> atc reset
Command executed OK

ATC SANITY
Supported by: LGP

Syntax
atc sanity
The atc sanity command simply displays the Autotune Controller’s firmware revision number, as
a means of checking the serial link. If the link is down, an error message is displayed.

3 - 38 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Example:
BRC> atc sanity
Firmware Revision 12.34
Cavity Count 3
Product ID 0x01
BRC> atc sanity
........
FAILED - Autotune link down

ATC SET CAV_VSWR_ALM


Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc set cav_vswr_alm cavity threshold
The atc set cav_vswr_alm command establishes a threshold for initiating a VSWR alarm on the
specified cavity. The threshold must be in the range 1.00 to 10.00.

Example:
BRC> atc get cav_vswr_alm 1 3.3
Cavity 1
VSWR Threshold 03.30

ATC SET TUNE_TIMO


Supported by: LGP

Syntax:
atc set tune_timo
The atc set tune_timo command sets the ATCC tune timeout.

Example:
BRC> atc set tune_timo 1
Tune Timeout 1mins

CCIMMUN
Syntax:
ccimmun
The ccimmun command returns the Control Channel Immunity configuration.

6866538D01-C 3 - 39
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Works only with Application Software.

Example:
BRC> ccimmun
Interference condition alert ratio : 20
condition hysteresis : 2
received signal strength : -50 dbm

Automatic handling : disabled

Proprietary Scrambler : enabled

seed : 000102 - 030405 - 060708


seed : 090a0b - 0c0d0e - 0f1011
seed : 121314 - 151617 - 18191a
seed : 1b1c1d - 1e1f20 - 212223
seed : 242526 - 272829 - 2a2b2c
seed : 2d2e2f - 303132 - 333435

CLS
Syntax:
cls
This command clears the current display. It is useful for removing clutter from the screen.

This command works only with Application Software from System Release D5.2 onwards.

DEKEY

Syntax:
dekey
The dekey command stops all RF transmission.

Example:
After the command is entered, an indication of a successful transmission stop is returned.

BRC> dekey
XMIT OFF INITIATED

3 - 40 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

EXIT
Syntax:
exit
Logs out the user and turns off run-time logging. This is most applicable on a remote MMI
session, as it will terminate the session. On a local MMI session this is equivalent to 'logout'

Example:
BRC_c1_p1# exit
Are you sure you want to exit?
[y/n]:y

Connection to host lost.

d:\temp>

This command works only with Application Software from System Release D5.2 onwards.

GET ACTIVE_TRACES
Syntax:
get active_traces
Displays a list of active report traces, to local and remote MMIs

Example:
BRC> get active_traces
No traces are currently active
BRC>

This command works only with Application Software from System Release D5.2 onwards.

GET ALARMS

Syntax:
get alarms
The get alarms command returns any BR alarm conditions.

Example:

6866538D01-C 3 - 41
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

If alarm conditions exist, every active alarm is returned.

BRC> get alarms


[brc fru warning]
[gps failure]

If no alarm conditions exist, a message is returned indicating alarms have not been detected.

BRC> get alarms


NO ALARM CONDITIONS DETECTED.

GET ALARM_MASK

Syntax:
get alarm_mask
The get alarm_mask command returns sixteen, 1-byte hexadecimal fields. These bytes represent
alarms that are enabled or disabled.
“ff” indicates that all alarms covered by that byte are enabled.

Example:
BRC> get alarm_mask
ALARM MASK is |ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|

GET ALARM_REPORTS

Syntax:
get alarm_reports
The get alarm_reports command returns the enabled/disabled status of the extended alarm
reporting mechanism.

Example:
BRC> get alarm_reports
ALARM REPORTS: TRACE is ENABLED

GET BRC_KIT_NO
Syntax:
get brc_kit_no
The brc_kit_no command returns the kit number of the BRC.

3 - 42 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Example:
BRC> get brc_kit_no
BRC KIT NUMBER is CTF1088A

GET BRC_REV_NO

Syntax:
get brc_rev_no
The brc_rev_no command returns the hardware revision number of the BRC.

Example:
BRC> get brc_rev_no
BRC REVISION NUMBER is RXX.XX.XX

GET BRC_SCRATCH
Syntax:
get brc_scratch
The get brc_scratch command reads the allocated EEPROM field reserved for a scratch pad on
the BRC.

Example:
BRC> get brc_scratch
BRC SCRATCH is Motorola, Inc.

GET BTS_TYPE
Syntax:
get bts_type
The get bts_type command prints the current BTS_TYPE setting on the BR MMI.

Example:
BRC> get bts_type
BTS_TYPE: EBTS

6866538D01-C 3 - 43
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

GET CABINET
Syntax:
get cabinet
The get cabinet command returns the cabinet in which the current BR resides.

Example:
BRC> get cabinet
CABINET is 1

GET DEFAULT_TX_POWER

Syntax:
get default_tx_power
The get default_tx_power command returns the default transmit operating power level. The
value is returned in Watts and dBm.

Example:
BRC> get default_tx_power
DEFAULT TRANSMITTER POWER is 75.00 watts (48.75 dbm)

GET DSP_SANITY

Syntax:
get dsp_sanity
The get dsp_sanity command returns the Digital Signal Processor (DSP) operational condition
as either passed or failed.

Example:
BRC> get dsp_sanity
DSP SANITY: PASSED
DSP Sanity check.... passed.

3 - 44 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

GET DSP_VERSION

Syntax:
get dsp_version
The get dsp_version command returns the current Digital Signal Processor (DSP) software
version number.

Example:
BRC> get dsp_version
DSP VERSION is 2.2

GET ENET_ID
Syntax:
get enet_id
The get enet_id command returns the Ethernet address for the current BRC.

Example:
BRC> get enet_id
BRC ETHERNET ADDRESS is 08 00 3E C0 02 C8

GET EXCITER_SCALING_FACTOR

Syntax:
get exciter_scaling_factor port
The get exciter_scaling_factor command returns the scaling factor for a specified Exciter
module A/D port (0 to 11).

Example:
BRC> get exciter_scaling_factor 1
EXCITER SCALING FACTOR 1 is 1.000000

GET EX_AD

Syntax:
get ex_ad [port]
The get ex_ad command returns the current hexadecimal value of all A/D ports (0 to 11) on the
Exciter module with their interpreted voltages.

6866538D01-C 3 - 45
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

If the variable for the port number is not entered, the current value of all ports are returned.

Example:
BRC> get ex_ad
EXCITER A->D PORT[0] = 0x6a[13.97v].
EXCITER A->D PORT[1] = 0x3[0.06v].
EXCITER A->D PORT[2] = 0xa2[9.90v].
EXCITER A->D PORT[3] = 0xfe [4.96v].
EXCITER A->D PORT[4] = 0x7c[4.84v].
EXCITER A->D PORT[5] = 0x1d[0.57v].
EXCITER A->D PORT[6] = 0xfe [4.96v].
EXCITER A->D PORT[7] = 0x39 [2.62v].
EXCITER A->D PORT[8] = 0x80 [5.00v].
EXCITER A->D PORT[9] = 0x6[0.06v].
EXCITER A->D PORT[10]= 0xfe [2.48v].
EXCITER A->D PORT[11]= 0x80[2.50v].

GET EX_THRESHOLD

Syntax:
get ex_threshold
The get ex_threshold command returns the two threshold power values currently stored in RAM.

Example:
BRC> get ex_threshold
The thresholds for register 01 of fwd LNODCT are:
Threshold Low: 16.0W
Threshold High: 40.0W

GET EX_KIT_NO

Syntax:
get ex_kit_no
The get ex_kit_no command returns the kit number of the Exciter module.

Example:
BRC> get ex_kit_no
EXCITER KIT NUMBER is CTF6339B

3 - 46 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

GET EX_REV_NO

Syntax:
get ex_rev_no
The get ex_rev_no command returns the hardware revision number of the Exciter module.

Example:
BRC> get ex_rev_no
EXCITER REVISION NUMBER is RXX.XX.XX

GET EX_SCRATCH

Syntax:
get ex_scratch
The get ex_scratch command reads the allocated EEPROM field reserved for the scratch pad on
the Exciter module.

Example:
BRC> get ex_scratch
EXCITER SCRATCH is Motorola, Inc.

GET FWD_PWR

Syntax:
get fwd_pwr
The get fwd_pwr command returns the current value of forward power. This reading is taken
from the built-in power meter of the RF Power Amplifier module. The results are returned in
Watts and dBm.

This command should be used only when the transmitter is keyed to obtain accurate results.

Example:
BRC> get fwd_pwr
FORWARD POWER is 39.57 watts [45.97 dbm]

6866538D01-C 3 - 47
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

GET FWD_WATTMETER_SCALING_FACTOR

Syntax:
get fwd_wattmeter_scaling_factor
The get fwd_wattmeter_scaling_factor command returns the linear multiplier used to derive the
forward power level from the external wattmeter located in the RFDS, if applicable.

Example:
BRC> get fwd_wattmeter_scaling_factor
FORWARD POWER WATTMETER SCALING FACTOR is 36.00

GET INFO
Syntax:
get info
Displays BRC hardware and configuration information. This includes software and hardware
revision numbers, transmit and receive frequencies and power. The DSP software version is only
available when the BR is keyed.

Example:

BRC> get info


BRC Code Version : R05.x2.xx
ROM Code Version : R07.03.03
BRC Revision : R03.00.00
Exciter Revision : R05.00.03
PA Revision : R07.00.00
RX1 Revision : R04.01.01
RX2 Revision : R04.01.01
RX3 Revision : R04.01.01
Receive Freq : 380.00000 MHz
Transmit Freq : 390.00000 MHz
Power Levelling Disable. [300 Seconds].
Maximum VSWR : 4.00:1
Forward Power : 0.00 watts [-inf dbm]
Reflected Power : 0.50 watts [26.99 dbm]
DSP Version unavailable as BRC is not keyed

This command works only with Application Software from System Release D5.2 onwards.

3 - 48 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

GET K_FACTOR

Syntax:
get k_factor
The get k_factor command returns the current operational k_factor value.

Example:
BRC> get k_factor
K FACTOR is 0.85000000

GET MAX_VSWR

Syntax:
get max_vswr
The get max_vswr command returns the maximum VSWR before an alarm is triggered, as
measured by the built-in power meters of the RF Power Amplifier module.

Example:
BRC> get max_vswr
MAXIMUM VSWR is 4.00:1

GET MAX_WATTMETER_VSWR

Syntax:
get max_wattmeter_vswr
The get max_wattmeter_vswr command returns the maximum Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
(VSWR) before an alarm is triggered, as measured by the external wattmeter located in the RFDS,
if applicable.

Example:
BRC> get max_wattmeter_vswr
MAXIMUM VSWR AT WATTMETER: 4.00:1

6866538D01-C 3 - 49
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

GET PA_AD

Syntax:
get pa_ad [port]
The get pa_ad command returns the current hexadecimal value of all A/D ports ( 0 to 11) on the
Power Amplifier module with their interpreted voltages.
If the variable for the port number is not entered, the current value of all ports are returned.

Example:
BRC> get pa_ad
PA A->D PORT[0] = 0x0[0.00v].
PA A->D PORT[1] = 0x0 [0.00v].
PA A->D PORT[2] = 0x3[0.06v].
PA A->D PORT[3] = 0x70[2.19v].
PA A->D PORT[4] = 0xf [0.29v].
PA A->D PORT[5] = 0xc [0.23v].
PA A->D PORT[6] = 0x5 [0.06v].
PA A->D PORT[7] = 0x6 [0.06v].
PA A->D PORT[8] = 0x5 [0.06v].
PA A->D PORT[9] = 0x80[2.50v].
PA A->D PORT[10]= 0x6[0.06v].
PA A->D PORT[11]= 0x80 [2.50v].

GET PA_COEF

Syntax:
get pa_coef
The get pa_coef command returns the Power Amplifier coefficients. These values are determined
and programmed during manufacturing.

Example:
BRC> get pa_coef
***AT AND BELOW 937.000 MHz***
PA COEFFICIENT FACTOR A: 0.04900
PA COEFFICIENT FACTOR B: 1.93630
PA COEFFICIENT FACTOR C: 3.84640

***ABOVE 937.000 MHz***


PA COEFFICIENT FACTOR D: 0.00300
PA COEFFICIENT FACTOR E: 1.87780
PA COEFFICIENT FACTOR F: 3.76310
PA TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT:

3 - 50 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

GET PA_KIT_NO

Syntax:
get pa_kit_no
The get pa_kit_no command returns the kit number of the Power Amplifier module.

Example:
BRC> get pa_kit_no
POWER AMPLIFIER KIT NUMBER is CTF1085A

GET PA_REV_NO

Syntax:
get pa_rev_no
The get pa_rev_no command returns the hardware revision number of the Power Amplifier
module.

Example:
BRC> get pa_rev_no
POWER AMPLIFIER REVISION NUMBER is R06.00.00

GET PA_SCALING_FACTOR

Syntax:
get pa_scaling_factor port
The get pa_scaling_factor command returns the scaling factor for a specified Power Amplifier
module A/D port ( 0 to 11).

Example:
BRC> get pa_scaling_factor 1
POWER AMPLIFIER
BRC> get SCALING FACTOR
pa_scaling_factor 1 1 is 1.000000
POWER AMPLIFIER SCALING FACTOR 1 is 1.000000

6866538D01-C 3 - 51
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

GET PA_SCRATCH

Syntax:
get pa_scratch
The get pa_scratch command reads the allocated EEPROM field reserved for the scratch pad on
the Power Amplifier module.

Example:
BRC> get pa_scratch
POWER AMPLIFIER SCRATCH PAD is Motorola, Inc.

GET PA_STATUS
Syntax:
get pa_status
Displays all configuration information and current status relating to the PA.

This command works only with Application Software from System Release D5.2 onwards.

GET PCTRL

Syntax:
get pctrl
The get pctrl command returns the current enabled/disabled state of the power leveling
functionality of the BR.

Example:
BRC> get pctrl
POWER CONTROL is ENABLED

GET POSITION

Syntax:
get position
The get position command returns the position number of where the current BR is mounted
within a selected cabinet. This does not represent the cabinet in which the BR resides.

3 - 52 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Example:
BRC> get position
POSITION is 2

GET PS_AD

Syntax:
get ps_ad [port]
The get ps_ad command returns the current hexadecimal value of all A/D ports ( 0 to 11) on the
Power Supply module with their interpreted voltages.
If the variable for the port number is not entered, the current value of all ports are returned.

Example:
BRC> get ps_ad
PWR SUPPLY A->D PORT[0] = 0xeb[28.04v].
PWR SUPPLY A->D PORT[1] = 0xe2 [14.17v].
PWR SUPPLY A->D PORT[2] = 0xd8 [5.13v].
PWR SUPPLY A->D PORT[3] = 0xd9 [4.20v].
PWR SUPPLY A->D PORT[4] = 0x3 [0.04v].
PWR SUPPLY A->D PORT[5] = 0xd0 [4.06v].
PWR SUPPLY A->D PORT[6] = 0x8e [2.77v].
PWR SUPPLY A->D PORT[7] = 0x86 [2.60v].
PWR SUPPLY A->D PORT[8] = 0xee [4.69v].
PWR SUPPLY A->D PORT[9] = 0x0 [0.00v].
PWR SUPPLY A->D PORT[10]= 0xca [3.95v].
PWR SUPPLY A->D PORT[11]= 0x80 [2.50v].

GET REF_PWR

Syntax:
get ref_pwr
The get ref_pwr command returns the current value of reflected power. This reading is taken
from the built-in power meter of the RF Power Amplifier module. The results are returned in
Watts and dBm.
This command should only be used when the transmitter is keyed to obtain accurate results.

Example:
BRC> get ref_pwr
REFLECTED POWER is 1.50 watts [31.75 dbm]

6866538D01-C 3 - 53
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

GET REF_WATTMETER_SCALING_FACTOR

Syntax:
get ref_wattmeter_scaling_factor
The get ref_wattmeter_scaling_factor command returns the linear multiplier used to derive the
reflected power level from the external wattmeter located in the RFDS, if applicable.

Example:
BRC> get ref_wattmeter_scaling_factor
REFLECTED POWER WATTMETER SCALING FACTOR is 52.00

GET RESET_INFO

Syntax:
get reset_info
The get reset_info command displays the cause of the last BRC reset. Possible reset causes are
(more than one may be displayed):
• Power-on reset
• Ext hard reset
• Ext soft reset
• Loss-of-lock reset
• Software watchdog reset
• Check stop reset
• Debug port hard reset
• Debug port soft reset
• JTAG reset
• Front panel reset
• Software controlled reset

Works only with ROM software.

Example:
BRC> reset_info
Reset status register = 0x00000000. Reset latches = 1
Reset cause :-
Software controlled reset

3 - 54 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

GET ROM_VER
Syntax:
get rom_ver
The get rom_ver command returns the current software version stored in firmware on the BRC
module.

Example:
BRC> get rom_ver
BRC ROM VERSION is RXX.XX.XX

GET RPTR_STATUS
Syntax:
get rptr_status
The get rptr_status command returns the overall status of the base radio.

Example:
BRC> get rptr_status
********************************************************
BRC CODE VERSION U07.02.02-TETRA-BRC-ROM
OUTPUT PORT 0 = 0x808604
INPUT PORT 0 = 0xc9b81f
INPUT PORT 1 = 0x808604

NUMBER WORKING RECEIVERS DETECTED : 3.


RX1 PRESENT...
RX2 PRESENT...
RX3 PRESENT...

BAND : TETRA {900 MHz}


RX FREQUENCY : 917.01250
TX FREQUENCY : 932.01250
TX IF FREQUENCY : 157.3 MHz.

WINDOW CLIPPING LEVEL: 5.500000 db.


WINDOW CLIPPING SATURATION LEVEL: 15.000000 db.
WINDOW CLIPPING MODE: ON

SGC STATUS : ENABLED


SGC DELAY : 0 units = 0.000000 msec. [msec = units/120]

PERIODIC TRAINING DISABLED. [900 SECONDS].


POWER LEVELING DISABLED. [300 SECONDS].
RF POWER REPORTS DISABLED.
RF ALARM REPORTS DISABLED.
POWER WATCHDOG ENABLED.
INITILIZATION TRACE DISABLED.

ALARM MASK :
|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|ff|

6866538D01-C 3 - 55
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

GET RSSI

Syntax:
get rssi num_of_reports num_of_samples
The get rssi command allows examination of the received RF signal quality of the BR. A
performance report is returned including Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) for each
branch, the Software Gain Control (SGC) attenuation setting, a composite RSSI level, Bit Error
Rate (BER), and the sync miss rate.
RSSI data is calculated for the specified number of samples. Each sample is averaged over the
specified number of reports specified. A report is generated once every 56.67 msec.

Works only with ROM software.

Example:
BRC> get rssi 7 1
Starting RSSI monitor for 7 repetitions averaged each 1
reports.

Line RSSI1 RSSI2 RSSI3 SGC DIV BER Sync Miss


dBm dBm dBm dB dBm % %
---- ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ --------- ---------
0 -58.5 -118.5 -111.7 10.0 -61.0 0.000e+00 0.000e+00
1 -58.5 -120.1 -117.4 10.0 -61.0 0.000e+00 0.000e+00
2 -58.7 -122.0 -119.2 10.0 -61.0 0.000e+00 0.000e+00
3 -59.4 -120.8 -116.3 10.0 -61.0 0.000e+00 0.000e+00
4 -59.4 -118.7 -118.7 10.0 -61.0 0.000e+00 0.000e+00
5 -59.3 -120.8 -109.8 10.0 -61.0 0.000e+00 0.000e+00
6 -59.4 -119.0 -115.5 10.0 -61.0 0.000e+00 0.000e+00
7 -58.4 -118.9 -114.5 10.0 -61.0 0.000e+00 0.000e+00

GET RX(n)_AD

Syntax:
get rx1_ad [port]
get rx2_ad [port]
get rx3_ad [port]
The get rx(n)_ad command returns the current hexadecimal value of all A/D ports (0 to 11) on
the Receiver module with their interpreted voltages.
If the variable for the port number is not entered, the current value of all ports are returned.

3 - 56 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Example:
BRC> get rx1_ad
RX1 A->D PORT[0] = 0xe0 [9.71v].
RX1 A->D PORT[1] = 0x67 [4.02v].
RX1 A->D PORT[2] = 0xe1 [9.76v].
RX1 A->D PORT[3] = 0xff [4.98v].
RX1 A->D PORT[4] = 0x7c [4.84v].
RX1 A->D PORT[5] = 0xe9 [4.51v].
RX1 A->D PORT[6] = 0x4a [1.45v].
RX1 A->D PORT[7] = 0x44 [1.33v].
RX1 A->D PORT[8] = 0x7c [4.84v].
RX1 A->D PORT[9] = 0xcf [8.09v].
RX1 A->D PORT[10]= 0x95 [2.91v].
RX1 A->D PORT[11]= 0x80 [2.50v].

GET RX(n)_DELTA

Syntax:
get rx1_delta
get rx2_delta
get rx3_delta
The get rx(n)_delta command returns the contents of the RSSI offset value in dBm for a selected
receiver.

The rx delta values should not be altered; they are calibrated during manufacturing.

Example:
BRC> get rx1_delta
RECEIVER 1 RECEIVE SIGNAL STRENGTH DELTA is 0.0

GET RX(n)_KIT_NO

Syntax:
get rx1_kit_no
get rx2_kit_no
get rx3_kit_no
The get rx(n)_kit_no command returns the kit number of a selected Receiver module.

Example:
BRC> get rx1_kit_no
RECEIVER 1 KIT NUMBER is CRF6114B

6866538D01-C 3 - 57
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

GET RX(n)_REV_NO

Syntax:
get rx1_rev_no
get rx2_rev_no
get rx3_rev_no
The get rx(n)_rev_no command returns the hardware revision number of the specified Receiver
module.

Example:
BRC> get rx1_rev_no
RECEIVER 1 REVISION NUMBER is RXX.XX.XX

GET RX(n)_SCALING_FACTOR

Syntax:
get rx1_scaling_factor [port]
get rx2_scaling_factor [port]
get rx3_scaling_factor [port]
The get rx(n)_scaling_factor command returns the scaling factor for a specified Receiver
module A/D port (0 to 11).

Example:
BRC> get rx1_scaling_factor 1
RECEIVER 1 SCALING FACTOR 1 is 2.000000

GET RX(n)_SCRATCH

Syntax:
get rx1_scratch
get rx2_scratch
get rx3_scratch
The get rx(n)_scratch command reads the allocated EEPROM field reserved for the scratch pad
on the specified Receiver module.

Example:
BRC> get rx1_scratch
RECEIVER 1 SCRATCH is Motorola, Inc.

3 - 58 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

GET RX_FREQ

Syntax:
get rx_freq
The get rx_freq command returns the programmed receiver frequency for the current BR.

Example:
BRC> get rx_freq
RECEIVE FREQUENCY is: 922.50000 MHz

GET RX_FRU_CONFIG

Syntax:
get rx_fru_config
The get rx_fru_config command displays the current receiver configuration of a Base Radio.

Example:
BRC> get rx_fru_config
RECEIVER CONFIGURATION { RX1 RX2 RX3 }

GET RX_INJ

Syntax:
get rx_inj
The get rx_inj command returns the high/low side injection status of the second Local Oscillator
(LO) for all receivers.

Example:
BRC> get rx_inj
RECEIVER INJECTION is LOW

6866538D01-C 3 - 59
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

GET RX_MODE

Syntax:
get rx_mode
The get rx_mode command returns the enabled/disabled status of the receiver.

Example:
BRC> get rx_mode
RECEIVER 1 is ENABLED
RECEIVER 2 is ENABLED
RECEIVER 3 is ENABLED

GET RX_QSIGN

Syntax:
get rx_qsign
The get rx_qsign command returns the current Q sign status of the receivers.

Example:

BRC> get rx_qsign


RECEIVER Q SIGN is NON-INVERTED

GET RX_STATUS

Syntax:
get rx_status
The get rx_status command returns status information of the receivers.

Example:
BRC> get rx_status
BRC> get rx_status
BER STATUS is UNLOCKED
BER STATUS is UNLOCKED
RECEIVER Q SIGN is NON-INVERTED
RECEIVER Q SIGN is NON-INVERTED
RECEIVER 1 ENABLED
RECEIVER 1 ENABLED
RECEIVER 2 ENABLED
RECEIVER 2 ENABLED
RECEIVER 3 ENABLED
RECEIVER 3 ENABLED
RECEIVER INJECTION is LOW
RECEIVER INJECTION is LOW

3 - 60 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

GET SYS_GAIN

Syntax:
get sys_gain
The get sys_gain command returns the enabled/disabled status of the system gain factor.

Example:
BRC> get sys_gain
SYSTEM GAIN is ENABLED

GET TETRA_FORMAT

Syntax:
get tetra_format
The get tetra_format command returns the current setting used for framed TETRA signalling.

Works only with ROM software.

Example:
BRC> get tetra_format
MCC: 0
MNC: 0
CC: 1
Downlink Type: 1
Uplink Type: 7
Trigger: frame
MS Power: 15 dBm
ACC param: -53 dBm

GET TRAINING_INTERVAL

Syntax:
get training_interval
The get training_interval command returns the number of timer ticks between training
operations.

Example:
BRC> get training_interval
TRAINING INTERVAL is 90000 ticks (15 min)

6866538D01-C 3 - 61
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

GET TXDC_I

Syntax:
get txdc_i
The get txdc_i command returns the value stored in RAM for the LNODCT DC i offset value.

Example:
BRC> get txdc_i
TXDC_I is 1

GET TXDC_Q

Syntax:
get txdc_q
The get txdc_q command returns the value stored in RAM for the LNODCT DC q offset value.

Example:
BRC> get txdc_q
TXDC_Q is 1

GET TXIQ_PH

Syntax:
get txiq_ph
The get txiq_ph command returns the value stored in RAM for the Exciter IQ phase_offset value.

Example:
BRC> get txiq_ph
Temperature corrected phase offset : 10.0 degrees.
Phase offset without correction : 10.0

3 - 62 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

GET TXLIN

Syntax:
get txlin [register]
The get txlin command returns the corresponding byte of the LNODCT registers (0x00 to 0x21)
as mapped into memory for LNODCT device number 1. For compatibility reasons with PR2 BR
the command and the registers are still named TXLIN.

Example:
BRC> get txlin
TXLIN [0x00]: 0x68TXLIN [0x01]: 0x18TXLIN [0x02]: 0x34
TXLIN [0x03]: 0xefTXLIN [0x04]: 0xf9TXLIN [0x05]: 0x00
TXLIN [0x06]: 0x00TXLIN [0x07]: 0x00TXLIN [0x08]: 0x00
TXLIN [0x09]: 0x21TXLIN [0x0A]: 0x10TXLIN [0x0B]: 0x00
TXLIN [0x0C]: 0x00TXLIN [0x0D]: 0x00TXLIN [0x0E]: 0x00
TXLIN [0x0F]: 0x00TXLIN [0x10]: 0x00TXLIN [0x11]: 0x1b
TXLIN [0x12]: 0x28TXLIN [0x13]: 0x00TXLIN [0x14]: 0x3a
TXLIN [0x15]: 0xbbTXLIN [0x16]: 0x53TXLIN [0x17]: 0x80
TXLIN [0x18]: 0xa3TXLIN [0x19]: 0x06TXLIN [0x1A]: 0x10
TXLIN [0x1B]: 0x00TXLIN [0x1C]: 0x08TXLIN [0x1D]: 0x02
TXLIN [0x1E]: 0x0fTXLIN [0x1F]: 0xbfTXLIN [0x20]: 0x00
TXLIN [0x21]: 0x00

GET TXLIN_STAT

Syntax:
get txlin_stat
The get txlin_stat command returns the operational status of LNODCT number 1. For
compatibility reasons with PR2 BR the command and the registers are still named TXLIN.

Example:
BRC> get txlin_stat
Checksum: 1641 (0x0669)
Test Register: 0x82
Clip Detect Bit OFF
Local Osc. Locked
I - Channel Software Offset Bit not set.
Q - Channel Software Offset Bit not set.
IRQ Bit not set
Over Current Detection Bit not set
Old Clip Detection Bit not set
During TX Slot Bit Set (Low Active)
Level Set: 0xbf
Sine Value: 0x89
Cosine Value: 0x00
Cir. Elim. Info: 0x0000
Offset Train. res.: 0x3f3d
LNODCT Rev. Control: 0x55

6866538D01-C 3 - 63
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

GET TXLIN2

Syntax:
get txlin2 [register]
The get txlin2 command returns the corresponding byte of the LNODCT registers (0x00 to 0x21)
as mapped into memory for LNODCT device number 2. For compatibility reasons with PR2 BR
the command and the registers are still named TXLIN.

Example:
BRC> get txlin2
TXLIN2 [0x00]: 0x68 TXLIN2 [0x01]: 0x10 TXLIN2 [0x02]: 0x34
TXLIN2 [0x03]: 0xef TXLIN2 [0x04]: 0xf9 TXLIN2 [0x05]: 0x00
TXLIN2 [0x06]: 0x00 TXLIN2 [0x07]: 0x00 TXLIN2 [0x08]: 0x00
TXLIN2 [0x09]: 0x63 TXLIN2 [0x0A]: 0x10 TXLIN2 [0x0B]: 0x00
TXLIN2 [0x0C]: 0x00 TXLIN2 [0x0D]: 0x00 TXLIN2 [0x0E]: 0x00
TXLIN2 [0x0F]: 0x00 TXLIN2 [0x10]: 0x00 TXLIN2 [0x11]: 0x1b
TXLIN2 [0x12]: 0x28 TXLIN2 [0x13]: 0x00 TXLIN2 [0x14]: 0x3a
TXLIN2 [0x15]: 0xbb TXLIN2 [0x16]: 0x53 TXLIN2 [0x17]: 0x80
TXLIN2 [0x18]: 0xa3 TXLIN2 [0x19]: 0x06 TXLIN2 [0x1A]: 0x10
TXLIN2 [0x1B]: 0x38 TXLIN2 [0x1C]: 0x08 TXLIN2 [0x1D]: 0x02
TXLIN2 [0x1E]: 0x0f TXLIN2 [0x1F]: 0xbf TXLIN2 [0x20]: 0x00
TXLIN2 [0x21]: 0x00

GET TXLIN2_STAT

Syntax:
get txlin2_stat
The get txlin2_stat command returns the operational status of LNODCT number 2. For
compatibility reasons with PR2 BR the command and the registers are still named TXLIN.

Example:
BRC> get txlin2_stat
Checksum: 32768 (0x8000)
Test Register: 0x80
Clip Detect Bit OFF
Local Osc. Unlocked
I - Channel Software Offset Bit not set.
Q - Channel Software Offset Bit not set.
IRQ Bit not set
Over Current Detection Bit not set
Old Clip Detection Bit not set
During TX Slot Bit Set (Low Active)
Level Set: 0xbf
Sine Value: 0xca
Cosine Value: 0x00
Cir. Elim. Info: 0x0000
Offset Train. res.: 0x5d26

3 - 64 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

GET TX_FREQ
Syntax:
get tx_freq
The get tx_freq command returns the programmed transmitter frequency for the current BR.

Example:
BRC> get tx_freq
TRANSMIT FREQUENCY is 937.50000MHz

GET TX_IF
Syntax:
get tx_if
The get tx_if command returns the current programmed transmit IF frequency.

Example:
BRC> get tx_if
TRANSMIT INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY is 157.30000 MHz

GET VSWR
Syntax:
get vswr
The get vswr command calculates the current VSWR, as measured by the built-in power meters
of the RF Power Amplifier module. This command should only be used when the transmitter is
keyed to obtain accurate results.

Example:
BRC> get vswr
VSWR is 1.35:1

GET WATTMETER
Syntax:
get wattmeter
The get wattmeter command returns the forward and reverse power readings and calculates the
VSWR from the external wattmeter which is connected to the antenna port. The output power
readings are calibrated and returned in Watts.
This command should only be used when the transmitter is keyed to obtain accurate results.

6866538D01-C 3 - 65
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Example:
BRC> get wattmeter
FORWARD POWER AT WATTMETER is 27.42 Watts (44.38 dBm)
REFLECTED POWER AT WATTMETER is 1.20 Watts (30.79 dBm)
WATTMETER VSWR is 1.53

HELP

Syntax:
help [commands | autocomplete]
The help command provides some information on using the BRC MMI. It provides the version
of the application running at present and help on options.
help commands displays a list of all the available MMI commands.
To get help on the ‘autocomplete’ feature type ‘help autocomplete’. The display is dependent on
the given access level. This command will return the subset of commands available for field
personnel.

Example:
BRC> help
Version : R05.x2.xx
The BRC MMI is a command line interface.
To execute a command type in the command name, any
parameters, and press return.
To recall previous commands, use the up and down cursor keys.
To get a list of commands that are available type "help
commands"
To get help on a specific command type the command followed
by "?"
There is an autocomplete facility on this MMI. For more help
on this feature.
type "help autocomplete".

Help command Syntax for System Releases prior to D5.2:


help
The help command returns all commands available for the BR software.
The display is dependent on the given access level. This command will return the subset of
commands available for field personnel.

KEY
Syntax:
key
The key command starts the RF transmission of the BR at default TX power.

3 - 66 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Example:
After the command is entered, an indication is printed that the key-up process has started. As soon
as the transmission has started and the default TX power has been reached the command returns
the current output power.

BRC> key
WORKING...
BRC> key TRANSMITTER KEYED: 5.12 watts

KVL

Syntax:
kvl
The kvl command prepares the Base Radio Controller for communication with the Key Variable
Loader device via the front serial port. Since the front serial port is normally used by the MMI,
no MMI commands are accepted until the communication with the Key Variable Loader device
has been terminated or the indicated timeout has been reached.
The success of this operation is indacted at the Key Variable Loader device only. BRC will return
to MMI mode and prompt user for new command.

Example:
BRC> kvl
KVLreset
BRC> session started. You have 60 seconds to connect your
KVL to the serial front port and to do the transfer.
____________________________________________________________
Dimetra Base Radio Controller

RESET

Syntax:
reset
The reset command performs a software reset of the BR. All parameters entered from the service
computer will be lost.

6866538D01-C 3 - 67
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Example:
BRC> reset
__________________________________________________________

Dimetra Base Radio Controller


Bootloader Version R01.01.00-BL
Motorola Inc. Copyright (c) 2001, 2002
__________________________________________________________
ROM Image 1 valid, internal version is 0x0000000A
ROM Image 2 valid, internal version is 0x00000009
Starting Image 1

RAM Test: .... passed

Base Radio Controller


Version R07.0404
Copyright (C) 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,
2000, 2001, 2002
Motorola Inc. All rights reserved.
Ethernet Test: passed
Running from boot code area

Board configuration: 50MHz / 32MByte


To enter configuration mode, hit any key within 10 seconds:
Starting BRC registration
Waiting for Registration

SET ALARM_MASK

Syntax:
set alarm_mask byte data
The set alarm_mask command enables/disables alarms from being acknowledged by the BR.
The input parameters are the byte number (decimal value 0 to 15) and the data (or mask) (hex
value 0x00 to 0xff).

Example:
BRC> set alarm_mask 1 ff
SETTING ALARM MASK: BYTE 1 MASK-VALUE 0xFF
ALARM MASK is set in RAM and EEPROM

3 - 68 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

SET ALARM_REPORTS

Syntax:
set alarm_reports {on | off}
The set alarm_reports command enables/disables asynchronous alarm reporting. Alarms are not
reported to the local terminal if they occur when the alarm reports are disabled.

Example:
BRC>set alarm_reports on
ALARM REPORTS : ENABLED

SET BRC_SCRATCH

Syntax:
set brc_scratch
This command permanently stores the data in EEPROM and is not lost when you exit test mode.
The set brc_scratch command writes to the allocated EEPROM field reserved for the scratch
pad of the BRC. This space is overwritten whenever the set brc_scratch command is issued.
A maximum of 40 characters may be entered into the scratch pad.

Example:
BRC> set brc_scratch
40 character limit
Motorola, Inc.
set BRC SCRATCH to Motorola, Inc. in RAM and EEPROM

SET CABINET

Syntax:
set cabinet {1 | 2 | 3| 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8}
This command permanently stores the data in EEPROM and is not lost when you exit test mode.
set cabinet parameter must only be set to “1”.
The set cabinet command sets the cabinet number of the BR.

ncorrectly setting these parameters on a remote session may result in a site visit.

6866538D01-C 3 - 69
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Example:

BRC> set cabinet 1


set CABINET to 1 in RAM and EEPROM

SET EXCITER_SCALING_FACTOR

Syntax:
set exciter_scaling_factor port scaling_factor
The set exciter_scaling_factor command changes the multiplier on the corresponding Exciter
module A/D port ( 0 to 11).

The scaling factor values should not be changed; they are set during manufacturing.

Example:
BRC> set exciter_scaling_factor 1 1
set EXCITER SCALING FACTOR 1 to 1 in RAM

SET EX_SCRATCH

Syntax:
set ex_scratch
This command permanently stores the data in EEPROM and is not lost when you exit test mode.
The set ex_scratch command writes to the allocated EEPROM field reserved for the scratch pad
of the Exciter module. This space is overwritten whenever the set ex_scratch command is issued.
A maximum of 40 characters may be entered into the scratch pad.

Example:
BRC> set ex_scratch
40 character limit
Motorola, Inc.
set EXCITER SCRATCH to Motorola, Inc. in RAM and EEPROM

SET EX_THRESHOLD

Syntax:
set ex_threshold
The set ex_threshold command updates the value stored in RAM and in the Exciter's EEPROM

3 - 70 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Example:
BRC> set ex_threshold 16 40
The thresholds for register 01 of fwd LNODCT are set to:
Threshold Low: 16.0W
Threshold High: 40.0W

SET FWD_WATTMETER_SCALING_FACTOR

Syntax:
set fwd_wattmeter_scaling_factor {1.0 .. 1000.0}
The set fwd_wattmeter_scaling_factor command changes the linear multiplier used to derive
the forward power level from the external wattmeter located in the RFDS, if applicable.

Example:
BRC> set fwd_wattmeter_scaling_factor 52.00
set FORWARD POWER WATTMETER SCALING FACTOR to 52.00 in RAM

SET K_FACTOR

Syntax:
set k_factor k_factor
The set k_factor command forces the TX Digital Signal Processor (DSP) K-factor. The K-factor
(range -.99 to .99) changes average power.

Example:
BRCBRC> set k_factor 0.6
K_FACTOR: 0.59999990

SET MAX_VSWR

Syntax:
set max_vswr {1.1 .. 4.0}
The set max_vswr command sets the maximum VSWR for the internal BR power monitor. The
power is rolled back if this value is reached. (The Base Radio may shut down if the excessive
VSWR condition still exists after power roll-back).

Example:
BRC> set max_vswr 4
set MAX VSWR to 4 in RAM

6866538D01-C 3 - 71
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

SET MAX_WATTMETER_VSWR

Syntax:
set max_wattmeter_vswr {1.1 .. 4.0}
The set max_wattmeter_vswr command sets the maximum VSWR for the external wattmeter
located in the RFDS, if applicable. The power is rolled back if this value is reached. (The Base
Radio may shut down if the excessive VSWR condition still exists after power roll-back.)

Example:
BRC>set max_wattmeter_vswr 4.0
set MAX WATTMETER VSWR to 4 in RAM

On Dimetra IP all BR’s on the site may be shut down. Determine the cause of the alarm and re-
enable the site using the brlock command, refer to page 3-16.

SET PA_SCALING_FACTOR

Syntax:
set pa_scaling_factor port scaling_factor
The set pa_scaling_factor command changes the multiplier on the corresponding Power
Amplifier module A/D port ( 0 to 11).
The scaling factor values should not be changed; they are set during manufacturing.

Example:
BRC> set pa_scaling_factor 1 1
set POWER AMPLIFIER SCALING FACTOR 1 to 1.000000 in RAM

SET PA_SCRATCH

Syntax:
set pa_scratch
This command permanently stores the data in EEPROM and is not lost when you exit test mode.
The set pa_scratch command writes to the allocated EEPROM field reserved for the scratch pad
of the Power Amplifier module. This space is overwritten whenever the set pa_scratch command
is issued.
A maximum of 40 characters may be entered into the scratch pad.

Example:
BRC> set pa_scratch
40 character limit
Motorola, Inc.
set PA SCRATCH to Motorola, Inc. in RAM and EEPROM

3 - 72 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

SET PCTRL

Syntax:
set pctrl {on | off}
The set pctrl command enables/disables the power leveling functionality of the BR. The output
indicates and verifies the changes.

Example:
BRC> set pctrl on
set POWER CONTROL to ENABLED in RAM

SET POSITION

Syntax:
set position {1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6}
This command permanently stores the data in EEPROM and is not lost when you exit test mode.
The set position command programs the position number of where the current BR is mounted
within a selected cabinet. This does not represent the cabinet in which the BR resides.

Incorrectly setting these parameters on a remote session may result in a site visit.

Example:

BRC> set position 2


set POSITION to 2 in RAM and EEPROM

SET REAR_SERIAL

Syntax:
set rear_serial {autotune | diagnostic}
The set rear_serial command switches the rear serial port to either Autotune Mode, where it
communicates with the Autotuner at 9600 baud, or diagnostics mode where it outputs diagnostic
information from the DSP at 115200 baud.

Works only with APP software.

6866538D01-C 3 - 73
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Example:
BRC> rear_serial autotune
Rear serial port in Autotune mode
BRC> rear_serial diagnostic
Rear serial port in Diagnostic mode

SET REF_WATTMETER_SCALING_FACTOR

Syntax:
set ref_wattmeter_scaling_factor {1.0 .. 1000.0}
The set ref_wattmeter_scaling_factor command changes the linear multiplier used to derive the
reflected power level from the external wattmeter located in the RFDS, if applicable.

Example:
BRC> set ref_wattmeter_scaling_factor 19
set REFLECTED POWER WATTMETER SCALING FACTOR to 19.00 in RAM

SET RX(n)_DELTA

Syntax:
set rx1_delta {>-100.0 .. +100.0 dBm}
set rx2_delta {>-100.0 .. +100.0 dBm}
set rx3_delta {>-100.0 .. +100.0 dBm}
The set rx(n)_delta command defines the contents of the RSSI offset value for a selected receiver
in dBm.

Example:
BRC> set rx1_delta 0.98
set RECEIVER 1 RECEIVE SIGNAL STRENGTH DELTA to 0.98 in RAM

SET RX(n)_SCALING_FACTOR

Syntax:
set rx1_scaling_factor port scaling_factor
set rx2_scaling_factor port scaling_factor
set rx3_scaling_factor port scaling_factor
The set rx(n)_scaling_factor command changes the value of the multiplier on the specified A/D
port ( 0 to 11) for a selected receiver.

3 - 74 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

The scaling_factor values should not be changed; they are set during manufacturing.

Example:
BRC> set rx1_scaling_factor 1 2
set RECEIVER 1 SCALING FACTOR 1 to 2.0 in RAM

SET RX(n)_SCRATCH

Syntax:
set rx(n)_scratch
This command permanently stores the data in EEPROM and is not lost when you exit test mode.
The set rx(n)_scratch command writes to the allocated EEPROM field reserved for the scratch
pad of a selected Receiver module. This space is overwritten whenever the rx(n)_scratch
command is issued.
A maximum of 40 characters may be entered into the scratch pad.

Example:
BRC> set rx1_scratch
40 character limit
Motorola, Inc.
set RECEIVER 1 SCRATCH to Motorola, Inc. in RAM and EEPROM

SET RX_FREQ

Syntax:
set rx_freq {917.000 .. 927.000}
The set rx_freq command programs the receiver frequency in the 917 - 927 MHz band. The
receive frequency for each receiver within a selected BR are programmed at the same time with
this command.
The programmed receiver frequency must be in the range of 917.000 MHz to 927.000 MHz in
6.25 kHz increments.

Example:
BRC>set rx_freq 922.500
set RECEIVE FREQUENCY to 922.500 MHz in RAM

6866538D01-C 3 - 75
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Within the RF subsystem of the Dimetra EBTS, several variations of a given Field Replaceable
Unit (FRU) or assembly may exist in which each variation corresponds to a specific frequency
range. Any receive or transmit frequencies assigned to a Base Radio via a command must
conform to any existing hardware constraints.

SET RX_FRU_CONFIG

Syntax:
set rx_fru_config {1 | 2 | 3 | 12 | 13 | 23 | 123}
The set rx_fru_config command sets which receivers should be present in a Base Radio.

Example:
BRC>set rx_fru_config 1
RECEIVER CONFIGURATION { RX1 }

BRC>set rx_fru_config 12
RECEIVER CONFIGURATION { RX1 RX2 }

BRC>set rx_fru_config 123


RECEIVER CONFIGURATION { RX1 RX2 RX3 }

SET RX_INJ

Syntax:
set rx_inj {high | low}
The set rx_inj command sets the current second Local Oscillator (LO) injection setting to achieve
high/low side injection.

Example:
BRC> set rx_inj low
set RECEIVER INJECTION to LOW in RAM

SET RX_MODE

Syntax:
set rx_mode {1 | 2 | 3 | 12 | 13 | 23 | 123}
The set rx_mode command enables any combination of the individual receivers of the current
BR.
If a receiver is not enabled (i.e., disabled) using this command, it is not used in calculations for
BER, RSSI, etc.

3 - 76 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Example:
BRC>set rx_mode 12
set RECEIVER 1 to ENABLED in RAM
set RECEIVER 2 to ENABLED in RAM

SET RX_QSIGN

Syntax:
set rx_qsign {inverted | non-inverted}
The set rx_qsign command sets the Rx q_sign to inverted or non-inverted.

Example:
BRC> set rx_qsign non-inverted
set RECEIVER Q SIGN to NON-INVERTED in RAM

SET SYS_GAIN

Syntax:
set sys_gain {on|off}
The set sgc_gain command enables/disables the system gain factor from being used.

Example:
BRC> set sys_gain on
set SOFTWARE GAIN to ENABLED in RAM

SET TETRA_FORMAT

Syntax:
set tetra_format MCC MNC CC downlink uplink trigger ms_pwr acc_prm

Table 3-1 Set TETRA_Format

Variable (Definition) Setting

MCC (mobile country code) default= 0

MNC (mobile network code) default= 0

6866538D01-C 3 - 77
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Table 3-1 Set TETRA_Format (continued)

Variable (Definition) Setting

CC (colour code) 1 to 63; default= 1


(In the Anritsu 3660 generator, the two least significant bits should
always be 1
Example:
cc=1 => Anritsu cc = 7
cc=3 => Anritsu cc = F)

downlink = 1 (TCH 7.2) (default; also used for reception of


channel type 9 (STCH))
= 4 (TCH 2.4)
= 31 (non-scrambled TCH 7.2 (Anritsu cc= 0))

uplink = 7 (TCH 7.2) (default)


= 8 (SCH/F)
= 10 (TCH 2.4)
= 11 (SCH/HU+SCH/HU)
= 31 (non-scrambled TCH 7.2 (Anritsu cc= 0))

trigger = off – no trigger (default)

= slot – triggers every slot

= mframe – triggers at start of frame 1 of each 18 frames.


(This trigger is specifically designed for the
Anritsu 3660 TETRA generator.)

= frame – triggers at start of frame 1 of each frame


(actual timing includes a 64-symbol pretrigger)
mobile power = 001 15 dBm default (will default to 15 dBm if this field is omitted)

access parameter = 0000 -53 dBm default (will default to -53 dBm if this field is omitted)

The set tetra_format command sets the tetra format of the BR signalling.

Works only with ROM software.

Example:
BRC> set tetra_format 0 0 1 1 7 mframe
MCC : 0
MNC : 0
CC : 1
Downlink Type : 1
Uplink Type : 7
Trigger : mframe
MS Power: 15 dBm
ACC param: -53 dBm

SET TONE

Syntax:

3 - 78 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

set tone {-18000 .. 18000}


This command keys the transmitter. Make sure that transmission only occurs on licensed
frequencies or into a dummy load.
The set tone command initialises transmission of a continuous single tone specified in Hertz. The
only way to discontinue this feature is via the dekey command.

Works only with ROM software.

Example:
BRC> set tone 1000
BRC> set tone 1000
set TONE to 1000.000000 in RAM
set TONE to 1000.000000 in RAM

SET TRACES_OFF
Syntax:
set traces_off
Turns off all active report traces. This includes alarm reports and any other traces that may be
enabled

Example:
In the example, alarm reports has been enabled and then disabled with set traces_off.

BRC> set alarm_reports on


ALARM REPORTS: ENABLED to LOCAL MMI
BRC> set traces_off
Alarm Reports is DISABLED to Local MMI

This command works only with Application Software from System Release D5.2 onwards.

SET TRAINING_INTERVAL

Syntax:
set training_interval num_of_ticks
The set training_interval command sets the period between tranlin training cycles.

Example:
BRC> set training_interval 30000
set TRAINING INTERVAL to 30000 in RAM

6866538D01-C 3 - 79
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

SET TXDC_I

Syntax:
set txdc_i offset
The set txdc_i command updates the value stored in RAM for the LNODCT DC i offset value.

Example:
BRC> set txdc_i 0
set TXDC_I to 0

SET TXDC_I_FINAL

Syntax:
set txdc_i_final offset
The set txdc_i_final command updates the value stored in RAM and in the exciter’s EEPROM
for the LNODCT DC i offset value.

Example:
BRC> set txdc_i_final 1
I CHANNEL DC OFFSET is set in exciter board’s EEPROM.
set TXDC_I to 1

SET TXDC_Q

Syntax:
set txdc_q offset
The set txdc_q command updates the value stored in RAM for the LNODCT DC q offset value.

Example:
BRC> set txdc_q 0
set TXDC_Q to 0

3 - 80 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

SET TXDC_Q_FINAL

Syntax:
set txdc_q_final offset
The set txdc_q_final command updates the value stored in RAM and in the exciter’s EEPROM
for the LNODCT DC q offset value.

Example:
BRC> set txdc_q_final 1
Q CHANNEL DC OFFSET is set in exciter board’s EEPROM.
set TXDC_Q to 1

SET TXLIN

Syntax:
set txlin register hex_byte
The set txlin command writes one specific hexadecimal byte ( 0x00 to 0x21) to the specified
LNODCT register ( 0x00 to 0x21) and updates the codeplug shadow registers. For compatibility
reasons with PR2 BR the command and the registers are still named TXLIN.

Example:
BRC> set txlin 1 08
set TXLIN 0x01 to 0x08 in RAM

SET TXLIN2

Syntax:
set txlin2 register hex_byte
The set txlin2 command writes one specific hexadecimal byte ( 0x00 to 0x21) to the specified
LNODCT register (0x00 to 0x21) and updates the codeplug shadow registers. For compatibility
reasons with PR2 BR the command and the registers are still named TXLIN.

Example:
BRC> set txlin 1 08
set TXLIN 0x01 to 0x08 in RAM
bfxbxbvxbvxbv

6866538D01-C 3 - 81
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

SET TX_FREQ

Syntax:
set tx_freq {932.000 .. 942.000}
The set tx_freq command programs the transmit frequency in the 932 - 942 MHz band. When
this command is entered, the transmitter frequency is programmed into the BRC.
The programmed transmitter frequency must be in the range of 932.000 MHz to 942.000 MHz in
6.25 kHz increments.

Example:
BRC>set tx_freq 932.000
set TRANSMIT FREQUENCY to 932.000 MHz in RAM

Within the RF subsystem of the Dimetra EBTS, several variations of a given Field Replaceable
Unit (FRU) or assembly may exist in which each variation corresponds to a specific frequency
range. Any receive or transmit frequencies assigned to a Base Radio via a command must
conform to any existing hardware constraints.

SET TX_IF

Syntax:
set tx_if freq
The set tx_if command sets the transmitter IF frequency in MHz.

Example:

BRC> set tx_if 157.3


set TRANSMIT INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY to 157.30000 MHz in RAM

SET TXIQ_PH

Syntax:
set txiq_ph phase_offset
The set txiq_ph command updates the value stored in RAM for the Exciter IQ phase_offset value.

Example:
BRC> set txiq_ph 10
PA Heatsink temperature: 30.27 --> txiq phase correction =
0.00
Temperature corrected phase offset : 10.0 degrees.
Phase offset without correction : 10.0

3 - 82 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

SET TXIQ_PH_FINAL

Syntax:
set txiq_ph_final phase_offset
The set txiq_ph_final command updates the value stored in RAM and in the Exciter’s EEPROM
for the LNODCT DC q offset value.

Example:
BRC> set txiq_ph_final 10
PA Heatsink temperature: 30.27 --> txiq phase correction =
0.00
TXIQ PHASE FACTOR is set in exciter board's EEPROM.
Temperature corrected phase offset : 10.0 degrees.
Phase offset without correction : 10.0

SET TX_TEST_MODE

Syntax:
set tx_test_mode {T1 | T2 | uplink | tones | exit | stop}
The set tx_mode command sets the transmit mode.

Works only with ROM software.

Example:
BRC> set tx_mode T1
Current tx test mode is T1 test signal.

SET TX_POWER

Syntax:
set tx_power power
This command keys the transmitter. Make sure that transmission only occurs on licensed
frequencies or into a dummy load.
The set tx_power command keys the transmitter to a specified power (in Watts) without altering
any programmed parameters.
In test mode, the current setting of default transmit mode (default_tx_mode) indicates the mode
of the transmitter.

6866538D01-C 3 - 83
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

Example:
A message is returned indicating transmitter activity.

BRC> set tx_power 40

WORKING...
TRANSMITTER KEYED: 40.12 watts

BRC>

STATISTICS
Syntax:
statistics {frag | ula} {slot}
The statistics command returns staistic on received packets.

Works only with Application Software.

Example:
a) Querying fragmentation statistics on slot1.
BRC> statistics frag 1
fragmentation statistics:
received MAC PDUs : 66
clear MAC PDUs : 66
decrypted MAC PDUs : 0
encrypted MAC PDUs buffered : 0
buffered MAC PDUs decrypted : 0
max pending encrypted MAC PDUs : 0
timedout MAC PDUs: : 0
received TMA/TLA indications : 61
unfragmented : 55
started fragmentations : 6
processed TMA/TLA indications : 61
valid : 33
invalid : 27
aborted : 1
timedout : 0

3 - 84 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

b) Querying uplink statistics on slot1.


BRC> statistics ula 1
uplink statistics:
TMV:
total number of indications : 282
indications with low RSSI : 0
indications with CRC fail : 266
TLD:
encrypted TLD indications : 0
failed TLD IND decryptions : 0
TMA/TLA:
total number of MAC PDUs : 16
MAC ACCESS/ MAC DATA : 16
MAC FRAG : 0
MAC_END/ MAC END HU : 0
NULL PDU : 0
BAD PDU : 0
failed late decryptions : 0
missing EL-SSI assignments : 0

VER

Syntax:
ver
The ver command returns the current version of the BR software.

Example:
BRC>ver
BRC SOFTWARE VERSION is RXX.XX.XX

6866538D01-C 3 - 85
February 2005
EBTS Interface Commands

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

3 - 86 6866538D01-C
February 2005
4

4EBTS Site Preparation and


Hardware Installation

Site Preparation

Site Planning
Proper planning helps to prevent potential on-site and off-site interference from other RF systems,
and helps maximise system performance. Site layouts should always be planned to minimise the
cabling lengths between RF equipment.
For full instructions and guidelines please refer to Motorola Standards and Guidelines for
Communications Sites, R56, Document number 68P81089E50.

EBTS Site Survey


The site must be carefully inspected or surveyed using appropriate site survey forms before orders
are placed for the equipment.
A technical representative from both the customer and the site owner should preferably be in
attendance for total concurrence at a single given time.
In order to minimise any misunderstanding which may arise in the future, the survey report must
be countersigned by all attendees at the site survey. The site survey should address all relevant
issues involving the EBTS site installation. All involved parties should be in agreement on all of
the issues before any work commences. The site survey issues are as follows:
• The potential location of the EBTS Cabinet, size of the equipment room, and the doorway
or access into it. Access around EBTS shall include adequate clearance for cabinet front
door opening.
• Verifying the suitability of the existing or proposed Heating-Ventilation-Air Conditioning
(HVAC) and other environmental criteria in relation to the EBTS equipment. (See
“Environmental Considerations” paragraph and Table 4-2, “Typical Power Loads and
Heat Dissipation Values” later in this chapter.)
• The potential location of the power supply equipment.
• The power requirements for the site.
• A check of the history of local voltage and frequency variations together with the
possibility of interruptions of the supply to the site.
• The standby power requirements for the site.
• The location of the mains power distribution.

6866538D01-C 4-1
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

• The location of the Network Terminating Unit (NTU) for the X.21 or E1 leased line.
• The location of telephone and modem connections.
• The location of the building earth and the tower earth.
• Inspection/test of the building and tower earth.
• The suitability, space availability, and location of the cable entry point into the equipment
room.
• The suitability, space availability, and location of the existing overhead cable tray or ladder
rack.
• The suitability and location of the existing lightning arrestors.
• The suitability, space availability, and location of the existing cable tray or ladder rack
between the equipment room and the antenna tower or the antenna system support
structure.
• The space allocated on the tower for the antennas.
• Measurement or length estimation of all cable runs.
• Checking the access route into the equipment room.
• Identifying the type of tower and the type of structure on which the antennas will be
mounted.
• Checking the access route to the site.
• Identifying any special conditions. For example:
• Access impossible in winter
• Access only with a security escort
• Access only by helicopter or all-terrain vehicle
• Identifying the site and equipment room key holder and the procedure to obtain the keys.
• Surveying the route the equipment will need to be taken between the closest point its
delivery truck can reach and its final position in the equipment room.
• Identifying any civil works or changes required to the existing equipment room or the
access to it.
• Identifying any Civil Works or changes required to the existing tower or antenna mounting
structure or the access to it.
• Checking that the working light levels in the equipment room required during the
installation and commissioning are adequate for the equipment, its cabling, and wiring to
be installed and tested.

350 - 500 Lux is the level required in an office environment. If the light level is inadequate, allow
for temporary lighting to be available during the installation and commissioning of the
equipment.

• Establishing any special working conditions. For example:


• Only out of hours working permitted.
• Only 8 daylight hours working permitted.
• Site escort only permitted to work restricted hours.
• Special working conditions or designated holidays which are restricted by local
regulations or statute.
• Verifying that the floor can sustain the weight of the EBTS site equipment.

4-2 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Site Considerations
The EBTS site building should not contain windows and must be able to resist extreme weather
conditions. It should be designed to meet the requirements of any and all local building codes,
and relevant regulations, applicable to the site location.
The DC Power supply for the EBTS has to be installed in the same building.

Motorola recommends the following considerations when selecting a site:


• For front access only stations allow a minimum of 80 cm for access.
• The minimum ceiling height of 2.4 m (7’11”) above a finished floor is required to allow
enough space for the height of the equipment cabinet and cable access at the top of the
cabinet.
• The ceiling structure should be able to support a cable tray assembly for routing the inter-
cabinet cabling and other site cabling. The cable tray assembly is mounted to the site
ceiling and walls per site plan and should be at least 2.2 m (7’3”) from the site floor to
allow for the height of the equipment cabinet.
• The door dimensions should be at least 91 cm (3’) wide and 2 m (6’8”) high.
• All exterior doors should have tamper proof locks installed for security purposes.
• The operating range of the EBTS is -20 °C to +55 °C and therefore the site interior
temperature must be maintained within these limits. Maintaining a stable, moderate site
temperature is the best approach for long term reliability of the equipment. The equipment
is not approved or intended for outdoor use.
• Proper surge protection is required for all antennas and power inputs to prevent potential
damage to the site equipment.
• The site floor should be true to within 3.2 mm (1/8”) of any equipment footprint and be
able to support the weight of the site equipment. Refer to the floor loading information
provided in this chapter.

Cabinets

Cabinet Dimensions
The Equipment Cabinet dimensions are as follows:
• Width: 60 cm (23.6”)
• Depth: 60 cm (23.6”)
• Height: 1.845 m (72.64”)

6866538D01-C 4-3
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Cabinet Footprint
The equipment cabinet has a footprint as shown in Figure 4-1.

/3 m

55.4 cm (21 13/16")


)
2"
27 c

60 cm (23 5/8")
0 .3
(3 78

M12 (1/2") Anchoring Bolts


typ. (4)

55.4 cm (21 13/16")

2.3 cm (29/32")
60 cm (23 5/8")

TEBTS025
011900JNM

Figure 4-1 Equipment Cabinet Footprint

The equipment cabinet may be installed against adjacent equipment. Figure 4-2 shows the cabinet
layout within a typical site, cabinets 2 and 3 are optional. At least 0.6 m (2’) of free space is
required in front of the cabinet and at least 15 cm (6”) of free space is required behind. Additional
free space is recommended at the back of the cabinet to greatly ease the removal and replacement
of FRUs. Additional free space is also recommended at the front of the cabinet to allow service
personnel easy access to the equipment.

Where there is no possibility to reach connectors at the rear of FRU's, it is possible to remove all
FRU's from the front of the EBTS by pulling the FRU sufficiently forward (after loosening the
retaining screws) to be able to grasp the connectors. In these cases it necessary to support the FRU
while the connectors are tagged and loosened.
The following units have to be removed in pairs:
• Combiner I and II

4-4 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

HVAC
Optional
0.91m(3')

Service Area 0.80m(2.6')

Power 1.55m(5')
Batteries Supply Cabinet

HVAC
Cabinet Equipment 0.60m(2')

Service Area 15cm(0.5')

Note: Double lines on above units indicate front of equipment.


TEBTS003
101701LHE

Figure 4-2 Typical EBTS Site Layout

Cabinet Floor Loading


Table 4-1 lists typical weight and floor loading information for various configurations of the
Equipment Cabinet.

Table 4-1 Equipment Cabinet Weight and Floor Loading

Weight Floor Loading


Configuration
kg (lbs) kg/m2

4-Channel Cavity Combining RFDS

1 BR 158 (347) 425


2 BRs 195 (428 530
3 BRs 243 (533) 670
4 BRs 277 (607) 800
1. Weight and loading data above assumes the following:
A. Double Site Controller installed
B. Double diversity installed
2. The information in this table is typical and is not a guaranteed specification.

6866538D01-C 4-5
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Special Considerations

Breaker Panel Access


Adhere to local electrical codes and regulations regarding clearance for electrical service access
to all fuse panels, breaker panels, etc. Typically, a minimum clearance of 91 cm (36”) is
recommended. Additionally, all doors to this equipment should be able to open to at least 90°.

Hazardous Materials and Equipment


Compliance with all local and any other regulations concerning the handling and use of hazardous
materials and equipment is the sole responsibility of the customer and associated agents.

Seismic Active Areas


EBTS sites that are in seismic active areas may require additional bracing of the equipment
cabinet. This manual does not contain specific procedures related to seismic bracing.

X.21 Facility Interface

Surge Arrestor
Per any local regulations, a surge arrestor may be required at the X.21 service entrance. The
arrestor should be designed for operation with a X.21 circuit. The arrestor typically is only
installed on the customer side of the X.21 service entrance. It should be wired per manufacturer
instructions.

Service Entrance
A rigid conduit sleeve must be installed to provide the service entrance into the site building. The
conduit should be about 5 cm (2”) in diameter and a PVC elbow should be attached (pointing
down) on the outside end of the conduit. The conduit must be grounded in accordance with the
Motorola Standards and Guidelines for Communications Sites, R56, 68P81089E50.

Site Utilities Backboard


A standard receptacle outlet should be installed on or adjacent to the backboard. This outlet can
be used for accessories, such as modems and other AC powered devices. This may also be used
as a general service outlet.

E1 Facility Interface

Surge Arrestor
A surge arrestor must be installed at the E1 service entrance. The arrestor must be designed for
operation with an E1 telephone circuit. The arrestor must only be installed on the customer side
of the E1 service entrance. It should be wired per manufacturer instructions.

4-6 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Service Entrance
A rigid conduit sleeve must be installed to provide the service entrance into the site building. The
conduit should be about 5 cm in diameter and a PVC elbow should be attached (pointing down)
on the outside end of the conduit. The conduit must be grounded in accordance with the Motorola
Standards and Guidelines for Communications Sites, R56.

Site Utilities Backboard


A wall mounted AC grade fire-rated plywood backboard (12.7 mm x 122 cm x 122 cm) must be
provided within the site. Reserve a two-square-foot area on the backboard for dedicated system
use.
An approved AC mains receptacle outlet should be installed on or adjacent to the backboard. This
outlet can be used for accessories, such as modems and other AC powered devices. It may also be
used as a general service outlet.

Environmental Considerations

Temperature Control
The environment in which the EBTS operates is an important consideration. The temperature
should be regulated to ensure trouble-free operation. Excessive temperatures result in generated
heat that may reduce the life-span of electronic equipment, and could cause permanent damage.
To combat temperature problems, a Heating-Ventilation-Air Conditioning (HVAC) system may
need to be used. All HVAC systems should be thermostatically controlled. The specified
operating temperature range for the EBTS equipment is -20 °C to +55 °C. Optimum equipment
operation occurs when the internal temperature of the EBTS site is maintained at 26 °C ±5.5 °C
(78 °F ±10 °F). The environmental equipment must be rated such that it is able to maintain the
environment to meet the equipment heat dissipation values, which are given in kilowatt-hours
(kWh). Refer to Table 4-2 for additional heat dissipation information.
The EBTS equipment operates on a -48 VDC (positive ground) power system which typically
includes batteries. Should AC power be lost, the DC power system continues to supply the EBTS
equipment with the necessary power. Because the EBTS remains operational during loss of AC
power, heat is still generated by the equipment. Unless the site HVAC is on a backup system, the
generated heat will effect the operation of the EBTS equipment. As a protection mechanism,
output power of the BRs is designed to decrease in the event that normal ambient temperature is
exceeded.
For sites containing more than one-hour battery backup, the effect of generated heat should be
considered. The HVAC system design should be evaluated to ensure the proper operating
environment is maintained during loss of the AC power.

Redundant HVAC Systems


A redundant HVAC system may be installed, if necessary. It must be wired on a delayed circuit
to prevent both HVAC systems from starting up simultaneously. The HVAC system should be
capable of automatically switching between the heating and cooling modes in response to the
thermostat. The controls must ensure that both modes never operate simultaneously.

6866538D01-C 4-7
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Existing HVAC Systems


Existing building HVAC systems may be programmed to turn off during non-occupied hours.
This type of HVAC system must be evaluated to ensure that the site temperature is maintained.

Humidity
At 35 °C (95 °F), the relative humidity within the site should be less than 75% non-condensing.
If the operating environment is subjected to large variations in humidity then special
considerations has to be made if the system contains cavity combiners. The auto tune cavity
combiner has a build in fine tune time out feature to compensate for humidity drift. Please refer
to Chapter 10, “RF Distribution System (RFDS)” for the full explanation of this feature.

Corrosive Environments
The equipment should not be directly exposed to corrosive environments. If the equipment site is
located in a coastal environment, proper air filtration for the site should be in place to protect the
equipment from salt mist contamination.

Air Quality
For cabinet-mounted equipment operating in an area which is not environmentally controlled, the
airborne particulates level must not exceed 90 µg/m3.

Electrical Requirements
All electrical wiring for the EBTS site must meet the requirements of any and all applicable local
codes and regulations.

Any device (i.e., power supply) providing isolation between the AC mains and the EBTSs must
provide reinforced insulation to hazardous voltages. the dc power source providing power to the
EBTSs shall comply with requirements specified for a safety extra low voltage circuit (SELV) per
EN60950, 1995.

Applicable Codes and Practices


The following list of codes and practices shall be adhered to when performing the installation:
• UK RPSG Installation Manual, System Quality Standard, specification number 2200, part
no. 68P02200F01.
• UK Institution of Electrical Engineers (IEE) 16th edition of their Wiring Regulations
(Appendix 12, “Cable Capacities of Conduit and Trunking”).
• Antenna System Installation Practice, issued by The Directorate of Telecommunications
of the UK Home Office.
• Details of Earthing Requirements for Masts, Aerial Feeder Cables and Radio Equipment
Rooms, issued by The Directorate of Telecommunications of the UK Home Office.

4-8 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

AC Service and Power Supplies

Service Current Rating


The input current rating of the DC power supply equipment shall be considered when selecting
the AC main service. When the facility HVAC is powered from the same panel or sub-panel as
the DC power supply equipment, the total draw (including start-up current) shall also be
accordingly considered.
The DC power system has normal loads and start-up loads, as does the HVAC. Both of these loads
are dependent upon the number of Base Radios in the site and the size and condition of the battery
system. The normal load of a typical power system is provided in Table 4-2 for several common
EBTS configurations using a two hour backup. These loads may differ for customer designed
power systems.

Table 4-2 Typical Power Loads and Heat Dissipation Values

Configuration (Total BRs on Site +Single


DC Load (kW) Heat (kWh)
Site Controller, RFDS, EAS)

2 Base Radios 1.0 0.95


3 Base Radios 1.4 1.35
4 Base Radios 1.8 1.7
The values contained in this table are to used for planning purposes only. These
values are typical and are not guaranteed equipment specifications.
† kWh values listed in the Heat column are approximate and based on nominal AC
Amps. Includes the heat generated by rectifiers and EBTS equipment.

EBTS DC Current Load


Table 4-3 lists typical power consumption values for various components within the EBTS.

The Base Radio current draw value given below is the steady-state value at full BR transmit
power. Instantaneous start-up current draw can be as high as 230 A, exponentially decaying to
25 A after 10 msec, and then stabilising at the rated current. This dynamic needs to be considered
when selecting a DC power system.

6866538D01-C 4-9
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Table 4-3 Typical Power Consumption of EBTS Components

Component Power Consumption

Base Radio 25 W 8.5 A @ -48 VDC


15 W 5.8 A @ -48 VDC
Site Controller 0.6 A @ -48 VDC
Environmental Alarm System 0.3 A @ -48 VDC
Receiver Multicoupler 0.5 A @ -48 VDC
Auto Tune Combiner Motor on 0.4 A @ -48 VDC
Motor off 0.2 A @ -48 VDC
The values contained in this table are to used for planning purposes only. These
values are typical and are not guaranteed equipment specifications.

Emergency Generator and Transfer Switch


Some sites may contain permanently installed emergency generators, however, most
telecommunications sites are equipped with connections for portable generators. Sites with
permanently installed generators usually have an automatic transfer switch used to transfer the
AC service from the utility power to the generator after the generator has started. Sites with
connections for a portable generator require a manual transfer switch and external connector.
Generators and transfer switches must be capable of supporting the maximum load for the
customer defined service area of the generator. Start-up loads that include the HVAC and rectifiers
must also be taken into consideration when selecting a generator size.
The EBTS site contains an Environmental Alarm System (EAS) that has five assignable dry
contact closures and multiple customer defined inputs. Permanent generator operation may be
monitored by one or more of these inputs, if desired.

Surge Arrestors
Per local regulations, a surge arrestor may be required adjacent to the AC power panel. Very short
wire lengths between the arrestor to the power panel are typically required for proper operation.
For sites using a transfer switch, the arrestor should be installed on the panel side of the transfer
switch. Additional arrestors may also be installed at the customer’s option on the line or generator
side of the switch.

Power Panel
Motorola recommends that all EBTS sites use a standardised power panel including circuit
breaker layout. Vacant space should be left to allow for future requirements.

4 - 10 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

– 48 VDC Power System


The EBTS equipment operates on a DC power system that typically includes a -48 VDC battery
system. A readily accessible power disconnect device (e.g., circuit breaker) for the EBTS should
be incorporated into the fixed wiring.
To protect against excessive current, short circuits and earth faults in the -48 VDC power source,
protective devices shall be included as part of the installation. The installation shall meet the
requirements of any and all applicable local codes and regulations.

DC Power Reference
The EBTS equipment operates from positive ground, 48 VDC power. Reference is made
throughout this manual to the -48 VDC and the DC return power leads. The -48 VDC and return
leads are kept isolated from chassis grounds in the equipment.
The positive (+) return lead is grounded at a single point on the rectifier load return bus. Table 4-4
shows the typical colour coding for these wires.

Table 4-4 -48 VDC Power Bus Colour Coding

Description Battery Connection Wire Colour

-48 VDC (nominal) Negative (-) Blue


DC Return Positive (+) Black
The -48 VDC side is negative polarity (-) in the 48 VDC system power bus and
the ground side is positive polarity (+).

Grounding Requirements

The methods and standards cited in the following paragraphs are typical. Local codes, statutes,
regulations, and/or standards shall supersede any information provided herein, as applicable.

Where wire size is specified, the next-larger size wire shall be used where specified wire size is
not available.

The EBTS site must meet certain specifications for adequate protection from lightning induced
transients. Proper ground installation methods are outlined in the Motorola Standards and
Guidelines for Communications Sites, R56. Refer to Quality Standards in Chapter 1 - Manual
Overview for information on obtaining the R56 manual. The references cited earlier in this
chapter shall also be followed.

Tower Grounding
Ground each leg of the antenna tower with a 2.44 m (8’) minimum-length ground rod driven near
each leg. All ground connections to the antenna tower must be exothermically welded. Do not

6866538D01-C 4 - 11
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

weld directly on tower structural members; weld only to provided tower grounding tabs or to
tower feet.

Make sure that welding ground connections to the antenna tower does not void the warranty of
the tower.

Metal monopole towers require a minimum of three 2.44 m (8’) long ground rods to be driven
into the ground, spaced approximately 3 m (10’) apart. These ground rods may be exothermically
welded to the bottom portion of the mast itself, to the monopole footing, or to the provided
grounding connection tabs.

Site Building and Equipment Grounding


At stand-alone site buildings, a PVC (typically 20 mm (3/4”), or equivalent) conduit must be
provided for the interior ground wire to exit the building. For site buildings with floors at ground
level, the conduit must exit a side wall at a 45° angle or less. For buildings with space below the
floors for a ground connection, the conduit may exit through the floor. In both cases, the location
of the opening should be close to the master ground bar inside the building.
Use of metal conduit is discouraged as the conduit provides inductance to a surge, raising the
impedance of the ground. If metal conduit is required by local building codes, both ends of the
conduit must be bonded to the ground wire through the use of grounding clips or other suitable
means to eliminate the inductance of the conduit.

Cabinet Grounding
Within the EBTS site, ground the cabinets with a single dedicated connection between the cabinet
and the site safety grounding system. The EBTS equipment cabinet utilises a Rack Ground Bus
bar (junction panel) to which the cabinet common ground connection to site safety grounding
system is made. The minimum connecting wire size must be at least 35 mm2 CSA (#2 AWG)
insulated copper wire. Typically, this wire shall use green (with yellow bands) coloured
insulation.
Use two-hole mounting lugs (and split ring lock washers when possible) with an anti-oxidant
grease applied for interior grounding connections and exterior secondary grounding connections.
If lock washers are used, they should be placed between the nut and the lug to ensure the
mechanical integrity of the connection. The washer must not be secured between the lug and the
surface to which it is connected. Painted connections must be scraped clean before applying the
anti-oxidant grease and lug.

Never use a bare or damaged wire for the connection of chassis ground or other electrical wiring.
damage to equipment or potential injury to personnel could result.

The equipment cabinet frame must be connected to the site ground using a single dedicated
ground wire.

The site ground wire should drop into the top of the cabinet and be connected to a single
designated grounding stud. Single hole lugs (13 mm (1/2”) diameter) are used for these grounding
connections.

4 - 12 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

The EBTS equipment cabinet is classified as a surge producer due to external coaxial cable
connections. Surges from outside the site can enter the site grounding system via the coaxial
cables. To prevent damage to the equipment, the cabinet must be connected to chassis ground
through a minimum wire size of at least 35 mm2 CSA (#2 AWG). Green (or green-yellow)
insulated wire must be used to identify all ground wiring.

Cable Tray Grounding


The cable tray assembly must be designed and installed so that it does not come into contact with
metal conduits, pipes, or other metal objects. The cable tray assembly must also be connected to
the building earth through the use of a single dedicated wire. The connecting wire shall be a
minimum size of 16 mm2 CSA (#5 AWG) green (or green-yellow) insulated copper wire.
Any metal-to-metal joints on the cable tray assembly must be bonded together with a wire jumper
to prevent electrical discontinuity, unless the tray connectors are specifically designed to ensure
continuity. Painted surfaces on the cable tray assembly must be scraped clean at the point where
the jumper wire is attached to ensure a good electrical connection. Repaint cable tray assembly
surfaces, if necessary.

Electrical System Grounding


The site electrical system should be connected to the rack ground bar (junction panel provides
RGB function) by a single connection. This should be from the panel/sub-panel in the equipment
room with a 35 mm2 CSA (#2 AWG) stranded insulated wire (typically green, or green-yellow,
insulation). For sites with sub-panels, the utility green Multi-Grounded Neutral (MGN) wire may
not be present. In this situation, an electrician may need to be consulted to extend the MGN from
the service entrance to the sub-panel. If this is done in metal conduit, then grounding clips should
be used at both ends of the conduit to minimise inductance.
If metal conduit is used for the electrical system, all connections must be bonded together through
conduit compression or screw fitting designed for such purposes. The metal conduit system must
not be in contact with other metal on the site including cable ladder or equipment cabinets to
minimise ground loops and sharing of surge energy. Small pieces of rubber or other insulating
material may be used on conduit clamps to eliminate any inadvertent connections.

Ensure a good connection between the electrical system ground and site ground to prevent
excessive voltage potential between the two ground systems during lightning strikes.

Power Supply and Battery Racks


Both the power supply rack and battery system rack should be individually connected to the
internal ground bar. Typically, a 35 mm2 CSA (#2 AWG) insulated grounding wire with a single
hole lug is used to make the connections. Refer to power supply equipment manufacturer’s
manual for specific information regarding power supply equipment grounding.

DC Power System Grounding


The DC power system is grounded only at a single point to prevent return current flow through
ground connections and ground loops. A 16 mm2 CSA (#5 AWG), or larger, insulated ground
wire (green, or green-yellow) with a double hole lug should be attached in one of the locations on
the DC return bus of the power supply rack. This ground wire is also connected to the Master
Ground Bar.

6866538D01-C 4 - 13
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

The return bus on the power supply rack may be supported by red insulators. The colour red in
these insulators has no significance.

Miscellaneous Site Grounding


A 16 mm2 CSA (#5 AWG) insulated ground wire may be installed within the site to connect the
miscellaneous metal items (such as the door, door frame, or HVAC grills) that are not likely to be
the source of electrical surges. All ground wiring should be routed near the ceiling, if possible.
One end of the ground wire must be connected to the building earth. This connection bonds the
remaining metal (conductive) items in the room with the ground system.

Ground Bars
There are two types of ground bars used in the EBTS site. Both ground bars should be mounted
immediately below the antenna entry plate on both the inside and outside of the shelter wall. The
ground bars must have direct wire connections to the site ground system.

Exterior Ground Bar


The Exterior Ground Bar (EGB) provides a convenient location to terminate coaxial grounding
straps and grounding wires from exterior metal surfaces as they enter the site, including:
• cabling entrance plate
• cable support
• air conditioner housing

Building Earth (Master Earth Connecting Bar)


The building earth should be located inside the equipment room preferably underneath or near the
cable entrance. Various metal structures within the site connect to the building earth, including
the ground wires from:
• EBTS equipment cabinet
• power supply rack
• battery system rack
• DC power system return
• RF surge arrestors
• electrical system
• cable ladder/ceiling support system
• other miscellaneous metal items and structures (door, louvers, etc.)
Motorola recommends the use of 6.35 mm (1/4”) thick copper ground bars (or equivalent) with
hole patterns to accept a minimum of 15 double hole lug connections (10 mm (3/8”) holes on 25.4
mm (1”) centre). The ground lead from the ground bars to the ground rod system should be a
minimum of 35 mm2 CSA (#2 AWG). Both the internal and external ground bars must be
connected together. This usually occurs when the internal ground wire exits the building and is
tied into the ground rings with the external ground wire.
For sites which are part of an existing building, a connection to the building steel may be made in
lieu of an underground ring. All other aspects of site interior grounding remain the same.

4 - 14 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Antenna Installation

Antenna Systems General Installation Requirements


The following is a list of general practices that shall be considered when installing antennas.
1 All site precautions specifications involving aerial rigging must be followed to the letter.
2 Under no circumstances shall the tower be climbed or worked on if thunderstorms are
occurring or even if they are forecast to occur in the general area.
3 Under no circumstances shall the tower be climbed or worked on if the temperature is below
5 °C (41 °F), or if there is ice on the structure of the tower.
4 All work on the tower shall be carried out in daylight.
5 Using a milliohmmeter, check that the tower earth is < 1.0 Ω, then check the building earth. If
either is greater than 1.0 Ω, then inform the site owner and the customer, as this must be
rectified by the site owner/administrator before any equipment can be installed.
6 Install the receive antennas on standoffs at the same recommended height, such that there is
one on each leg of a triangular tower with at least 6 m (19.6’) horizontal distance between
each.
7 Install the Transmit antenna on the top of the tower (where possible).
8 Install the GPS antenna in the agreed position, which may be lower down the tower.
9 Using a Time Domain Reflectometer (TDR), check that each drum of antenna feeder cable
and jumper cable is undamaged.
10 Install the five antenna feeder cables, securing them with a cable clamp or cleat every 1.0 m
(3.28’), then install an earth clamp on each at the top and bottom of the vertical run of cable.
11 Connect each of the earth clamps to the tower earth using the earth cable and ring terminals.
12 Install the five lightning arrestors in the cable entry plate, then install the plate in the
equipment room cable entry point.
13 Using appropriately sized earth cable and ring terminals, connect the bond stud on the cable
entry plate to the building earth in the room.
14 With a milliohmmeter, check that the earth connection between the cable entry plate and the
building earth in the room is < 1.0 Ω.
15 Install cable connectors on the end of the antenna feeder cables. Then, connect each to one of
the five lightning arrestors on the outside of the cable entry plate.
16 Install an earth clamp on each of the antenna feeder cables within 100 mm of the connector
into the lightning arrestor. Then, using an appropriately sized earth cable and ring terminals,
connect the each clamp to the bond stud on the outside of the cable entry plate.
17 With a milliohmmeter, check that the earth connection between the cable entry plate and each
earth clamp on the cables is < 1.0 Ω.
18 Install the five jumper cables with their connectors on the inside of the lightning arrestors
inside the equipment room, if the internal cable tray is not installed.
19 Using a TDR, check that each of the five antenna systems has been installed correctly and that
none of the antenna feeder cables have been damaged during their installation.

6866538D01-C 4 - 15
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

20 Make a copy of each TDR test to record the results.


21 Seal all the antenna cable joints against the ingress of dirt and damp with several layers of
suitable sealing tape or compound.
22 Remove all pallets, packing, and cable drums. Clean the area.

Antenna Feed Line Requirements


The transmission line entry for all antennas should be installed with a metal antenna entry plate
external to the site building. All cabling entry ports must be covered to prevent small animals or
objects from entering. Transmission lines must be grounded to the exterior ground bar below the
cabling entry port using manufacturer approved grounding kits.
To reduce interference (intermodulation) problems, connectors on the transmit antenna lines must
be gold plated centre pins and a gold, silver, or ternary Cu-Sn-Zn alloy plated outer conductor.
The plating on the male-female connector combination must match on both connectors. For
example, a male connector containing a gold plated centre pin and silver plated outer conductor
must match the female connector with a gold plated centre pin and silver plated outer conductor.
All connectors at the cabling entrance are Type N. Connector types at the antenna end may vary
depending upon the antenna and jumper combinations selected by the customer.

Antenna Feed Line Identification


All antenna feed lines should be marked appropriately to simplify connections to the proper
EBTS equipment. Coloured vinyl tape is recommended for use in identifying the antenna feed
lines. Use 3M coloured outdoor marking tape or a permanent, colour-fast equivalent.

Antenna Surge Arrestors


All antenna feed lines should typically terminate with a suitable surge arrestor within 30 cm (12”)
inside of the entry window. Each arrestor must connect to the master ground bar located below
the entry plate. It is recommended that the arrestors be mounted to a mounting bracket to simplify
grounding cable and installation.

Site Reference Operation Modes


The ETSI standard allows two modes of operation of adjacent cells: Synchronized and Non-
Synchronized relative to the serving cell. The EBTS uses GPS to synchronize to the same time
reference. For an adjacent cell to be indicated to be synchronized requires that both the serving
EBTS and the adjacent cell are synchronized to GPS.
The EBTS can be configured via BTS Service Software for three different operating
configurations, which control the synchronisation mode:
• Normal Synchronized Configuration (NSC):
This configuration is used to specify that the EBTS should only operate in synchronized mode
relative to GPS. If the GPS reference is lost the EBTS will reset at the expiry of a configurable
free-run timer and will then wait for the GPS to be restored before resuming operation. During
operation the EBTS will however reflect the adjacent cell synchronization mode according to
TETRA standard in the information to the subscribers.
• Automatic Synchronized Configuration (ASC):

4 - 16 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

This configuration is used to specify that the EBTS should operate in synchronized mode
relative to GPS; however if the GPS reference is lost, the EBTS will continue to operate in
synchronized mode for a configurable period (free-run time). If the GPS reference is not
recovered in this time period, the EBTS will switch to non-synchronised mode. If an EBTS is
started when no GPS reference is available, it will operate in non-synchronised mode.
Non-synchronized mode will not have optimized handover performance. When operating in
non-synchronised mode all the adjacent cells will be indicated as non-synchronized with the
EBTS. In order to re-synchronise an EBTS that is running non-synchronised it is necessary to
perform a reset when the GPS reference is present. Prolonged operation in non-synchronized
mode will eventually lead to critical alarms and the frequency accuracy of the EBTS will no
longer be guaranteed.
To maintain the frequency accuracy it is necessary that the oscillator within the EBTS is
periodically recalibrated. The periodic recalibration happens automatically when a GPS
reference is present. The critical alarms indicate that re-calibration is due and should be
performed without delay.
• Forced Non-Synchronized Configuration (FNC):
It is not recommended for System Release D5.2. The EBTS will always operate non-
synchronized to GPS. The failure or lack of GPS will not be reported as an alarm. The EBTS
will start up in non-synchronized mode regardless of the presence of a GPS signal. However
if GPS is present the site reference is trained accordingly. Prolonged operation in this
configuration without GPS will eventually lead to critical alarms and the frequency accuracy
of the EBTS will no longer be guaranteed.
To maintain the frequency accuracy it is necessary that the oscillator within the EBTS is
periodically recalibrated. The periodic recalibration happens automatically when a GPS
reference is present. If no GPS reference is present, it will be necessary to perform the
calibration manually. The critical alarms indicate that re-calibration is due and should be
performed without delay.
It is possible to change configuration with BTS Service Software. The new configuration will
only be active after an EBTS reset.

GPS Tracking Criteria


To allow a system to successfully initialise for the first time at a new location, the Position
Dilution Of Position (PDOP) must be less than 10.0 (a low PDOP value indicates a low error
(higher accuracy) in the position calculated by the GPS receiver).
PDOP is an accuracy factor which is a function of the relative positions of the satellites. If the
satellites being tracked by the GPS receiver are within close relative proximity to each other, the
resulting PDOP will be poor. Conversely, if the satellites are relatively far from each other, PDOP
will be improved. Because any error in position results in a timing error in the BR transmission,
the BRs are not allowed to key until the position error is acceptably low. Therefore, a site with a
large PDOP value may incur a delay when the site is first initialised.
For Dimetra IP the position is actively monitored for 24 hours. The position with the best PDOP
value over this period is selected as the final position, and is then permanently stored for future
starts. The stored position will be reset each time Install is run.
Excessive PDOP values may be the result of the GPS antenna(s) not having an adequate “view”
of the sky to initially determine its position. Motorola recommends locating the antenna(s) such
that there is no PDOP values that exceed 10.0 for periods of more than 15 minutes. Once a system
is operating and the site position has been stored, a PDOP of greater than 10.0 will not effect

6866538D01-C 4 - 17
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

performance, as long as at least one satellite is being tracked. However, to maintain a maximum
reliability, three satellites should be tracked at all times.
The system must be capable of the following:
• Tracking a minimum of four satellites during initial start-up
• Tracking three satellites continuously for maximum reliability.

GPS Evaluation Kit


The Motorola GPS evaluation kit can be used to evaluate the site and antenna mounting location
prior to site acceptance. Although many GPS receivers are available, the Motorola GPS
evaluation kit includes the same receiver and antenna used in the EBTS. The data reported by this
kit is the same as that used by the EBTS, if the antennas were installed in the test locations.
The evaluation kit includes software programs and the instructions necessary to collect the
necessary data in order to evaluate the site. The necessary data includes:
• Dilution Of Precision (DOP)
• DOP Type (Position or Horizontal)
• Number of visible satellites
• Number of satellites being tracked

GPS Start Up
The times given below are from applying power to the system to the frequency locked LED
illuminating. GPS start up is the significant contributing factor in determining System Start Up
times
• Initial Start:
This is the first time an EBTS is powered on or after the Almanac or Position information has
been erased from Non Volatile Memory. The site needs to locate 4 satellites and then train the
reference oscillator from an unknown state.
• Warm Start:
The EBTS has been previously powered up and the Non Volatile Memory contains valid
Almanac and Position information and the reference oscillator was trained prior to starting the
site. The times quoted are for a power off restart a software restart will be slightly faster.
• Soft Restart:
This is a BTS restart where power is maintained during the reset, e.g remote BTS restart after
software upgrade. The GPS receiver will continue to track satellites during the BTS restart,
thus eliminating the ‘search for satellites’ phase of start-up.

Table 4-5 GPS Start-up Time

GPS Start-up Times

Initial Start Normal Start Soft Restart

Typical Maximum Typical Maximum Typical Maximum

10 Minutes 30 Minutes 4 Minutes 10 Minutes 90 Seconds 8 Minutes

4 - 18 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

If these start-up times are exceeded then follow the procedures for GPS Site Controller fault
indications section

GPS Antenna Requirements


The antenna must be mounted high enough to clear the peak of the EBTS site roof. For systems
in the northern hemisphere, the GPS antenna should be mounted so that a clear view of the
southern sky is maintained.
Isolate the GPS antenna from RF interference by mounting the antenna at least 3.7 m (12’)
horizontally from other transmitting antennas.
Adjacent structures, such as trees or buildings, are obstructions due to their wide, solid profiles.
Mount the GPS antenna to clear these obstructions and provide a clear path. Adjacent antenna
towers at the RF site which protrude into the required view have a minimal effect on GPS satellite
reception and are not obstructions.

The colour coding schemes identified within this manual are a recommendation only. The
purpose for identifying specific colours is an attempt to obtain uniformity between EBTS sites.
Other colour schemes may be used.

GPS antennas are colour-coded yellow. The same identification technique used for RF antennas
is also used to identify the GPS antennas, refer to Table 4-6.

Table 4-6 GPS Antenna Identification

Band Description

One yellow band GPS Antenna 1


Two yellow bands GPS Antenna 2
Note: If an external GPS is being used then use the markings above for the external GPS input

6866538D01-C 4 - 19
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

GPS Antenna Line Loss


The maximum allowable line attenuation between the antenna and the Site Controller GPS
Receiver (GPSR) input is 6 dB. There is an additional 4 dB of attenuation for foliage. In a typical
EBTS installation using 1/2” low density foam coaxial cable (or equivalent), the length of the
cable run should never exceed 46 m (151 ft). This is sufficient for most installations.
When considering the use of longer cables, calculate the cable lengths allowing 4.5 dB of loss at
1.5 GHz (the GPS receiver frequency). The remaining 1.5 dB of attenuation is provided by
interior site cabling and connectors.

Remote GPS (RGPS) Installation Verification


If a remote GPS is installed, the Site Controllers perform the following steps during GPS training
when the TSC Application starts up (Dimetra IP):
• Attempt communication with an internal GPS receiver. If an internal GPS receiver is found
then GPS satellite tracking will commence. The status sri -gps command will report the
GPSR Type as ‘INTERNAL’.
• After approximately ten seconds of attempted communication to the internal receiver power
is applied to the external receiver. The cable delay is measured (a process which takes
approximately 18 seconds) and communication occurs with the external GPS receiver. If
successful the status sri -gps command will report the GPSR Type as ‘EXTERNAL’ and also
display the cable delay.

If neither an internal nor external GPS receiver is found then the search resumes for an internal
GPS receiver. During the search process the status sri -gps command will report the GPSR Type
as ‘UNKNOWN’.

Figure 4-3 Mating View of Remote GPS Receiver

Independently Powered Remote GPS units


On certain EBTS sites an RGPS receiver with an independent power supply may be used (for
example fiber optic connection to the RGPS receiver). When using an RGPS receiver there is a
transmission time delay proportional to the distance of the RGPS receiver to the EBTS. For a
independently powered RGPS receiver with cable length greater than 500 m this time delay

4 - 20 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

cannot be automatically calculated by the TSC and needs to be entered manually via the TSC
Application MMI.
During installation of the EBTS the time delay value will be manually measured and should be
known to the user. The time delay is entered via the TSC MMI using the 'rgps_delay' command
which is used as follows: rgps_delay -set xxx (See Chapter “EBTS Interface Commands” for full
description of rgps_delay) where xxx is the time delay measurement in nanoseconds. In order for
the independently powered RGPS receiver to operate correctly a time delay must be entered
otherwise the TSC will assume that a normal GPS receiver is installed.
The TSC must be reset after a new time delay has been set.

Alarm Wiring
Various alarms or sensors are installed within the EBTS site building. All alarm wiring terminates
at the Environmental Alarm System (EAS) located within the Equipment Cabinet. The electrical
contacts for the alarms must be dry contacts and remain normally closed (open on alarm).
Motorola recommends site installation of the following alarms:
• Smoke detector (line powered)
• Intrusion alarm
• High temperature sensor
• Low temperature sensor
The high temperature sensor should be capable of monitoring temperatures above 27 °C (80 °F).
The low temperature sensor should be capable of monitoring temperatures below 21 °C (70 °F).
Temperature sensors should be mounted to the utilities wiring board at a convenient height to
facilitate the setting and inspection of the trigger points.
Local codes may require an additional contact closure to deactivate the HVAC system and prevent
circulation of smoke in the event of a fire. An additional smoke detector may be used to provide
this contact. It can also be configured to trigger an external alarm, if required.
If a second alarm closure is used, it must be completely isolated from the dedicated EBTS smoke
alarm circuit. Parallel connection of the HVAC controller through these contacts may damage the
HVAC and EBTS equipment. This is because the HVAC low voltage controller typically has
5 VDC negative ground, which opposes the -48 VDC EBTS supply.
If specialised automatic fire suppression systems are installed within the site, water flow alarms
or Halon release alarms may also be required. These systems may also have to be remotely
monitored for unattended facilities. Check local codes for additional information and
requirements.

6866538D01-C 4 - 21
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Receipt of Equipment

Equipment Inspection
Inspection of the EBTS equipment must be performed as soon as all equipment is unpacked.

If obvious damage has occurred to the shipping containers before unpacking, contact the shipping
agent and ask that a representative of their company be present while the equipment is unpacked.

Observe guidelines for safe handling of electro-static sensitive devices or equipment to prevent
electro-static damage. An anti-static wrist strap is provided with the EBTS and should always be
worn when handling any electrical component.
Inspect the following upon receipt of the EBTS:
• Check for loose or damaged equipment
• Check all sides of the cabinet for dents, scratches, or other damage
• Check all cabinet wiring to ensure connections are in place
• Check modules and boards for physical damage to controls or connectors
• Verify that ground straps are secure

If any equipment is damaged, contact the shipping company immediately, then your Motorola
representative.

Equipment Inventory
Check the EBTS equipment against the itemised packing list to ensure that all equipment was
received. If available, check the sales order with the packing list to account for all equipment
ordered. Contact your Motorola representative to report missing items and for additional
information.

4 - 22 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Hardware Installation

Installation Overview
The procedures described in this chapter assume the field technician or installer has knowledge
of the installation techniques contained in the Motorola Standards and Guidelines for
Communications Sites, R56.

Prior to performing the installation procedures, prepare the site with all associated antennas,
communications lines, and other related site equipment.

Installation procedures provided in this chapter cover the EBTS Equipment Cabinet.
In an EBTS site, the term “cabinet” is a generic term used to refer to Fixed Network Equipment
(FNE) mounted in different types of frames. It does not refer in any way to building electrical
cabinets, outdoor utility cabinets, or some types of equipment shelters commonly known as
cabinets.
The Equipment Cabinet uses a Schroff Eurorack, which is referred to as a “1.9-metre cabinet”.
This cabinet ships standard as an open frame with four corner posts with top and bottom
assemblies to tie the posts together. Actual cabinet height is 1845 mm but also a 50 mm lifting
eye on the top of the cabinet would give a total height of 1895 mm.

Personnel Considerations
The following personnel will typically be required to install an EBTS site:
• A working Installation Supervisor.
• A minimum of two Installers per EBTS site. (Two Installers could include the working
supervisor, provided there is a minimum of two persons on each EBTS site at all times.)
• Two Aerial Riggers to install the antenna system.
• A Commissioning Engineer (attends only during the commissioning stage).

Transportation of the Equipment


It is recommended that to move and locate all the equipment in its final position, or in the case of
securing antenna systems to the base of the tower or structure on which the antenna systems are
to be mounted, a transportation company specialising in the moving of heavy electronic
equipment should be used.

6866538D01-C 4 - 23
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Lifting Equipment Rack

Safety Considerations

Crush hazard could result in death, personal injury or equipment damage. Equipment racks can
weigh up to 545 kg (1,200 lbs.). Follow instructions below for proper lifting procedures.

Equipment racks should only be lifted without the use of lifting equipment when there are
sufficient personnel available to ensure that regulations covering Health and Safety are not
breached.
Motorola recommends the use of appropriate powered mechanical lifting apparatus for moving
and lifting the equipment racks.
In addition to these points, refer to and comply with any local regulations that govern the use of
lifting equipment.

Lifting Equipment racks from Horizontal


In some cases the equipment racks are laid down horizontal to facilitate the shipping process. Use
appropriate lifting apparatus to lift the racks upright complying with all applicable health and
safety regulations and any other regulations applicable to lifting heavy equipment.

Crush hazard could result in death, personal injury or equipment damage. Do NOT use eyenuts
to lift the rack upright from horizontal position. Eyenuts could fail resulting in the equipment
dropping.

Do NOT use the eyenuts mounted on top of the rack to lift the equipment upright from a
horizontal position. The eyenuts are NOT designed to lift in this direction and could fail resulting
in the equipment dropping.

Lifting Equipment Racks Vertically


If it is necessary to lift the equipment rack vertically, four (4) M10 eyenuts are provided mounted
to the top of the rack. Before attempting to use, visually check the eyenuts and associated rack
hardware for damage that may have occurred during transit. If any damage is apparent, DO NOT
USE; contact Motorola for replacement.

4 - 24 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

ALL four (4) eyenuts MUST be used when lifting the equipment rack. When lifting from a center
point, the distance from each eyenut to the lifting point must be minimum 40 inches (1 meter) to
ensure the proper lifting angle is maintained (see Figure 4-4). Using a length shorter than that
specified could cause the eyenuts to fail.
If eyenuts are removed or become loose, they must be properly installed before they are used to
lift the equipment rack. Eyenuts must be aligned to point towards the center lifting point of the
cabinet (see Figure 4-5) and tightened to between 10-13.5 Nm (90-120 in-lbs) torque. This can
be accomplished by hand tightening the eyenut and bolt assembly and tightening the bolt (turning
clockwise) an additional 45 degrees. Correct eyenut tightness and alignment are crucial to ensure
the eyenut assembly will perform to its intended lifting capacity.

Center
Lifting
Point

> 1 m (40 in )

Front View

Figure 4-4 Minimum Distance Eyenut to Lifting Point

Center
Lifting
Point

Eyenut

Figure 4-5 Top View Equipment Rack "Eyenut Alignment"

EBTS Pre-Installation Checklist


The installation shall only be carried out after the following activities have been completed:
• Antenna installation (including GPS antenna)
• New building earth (if required)
• The installation of the X.21 or E1 link (to the control centre) by the telephone line service
provider

6866538D01-C 4 - 25
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

• The installation of the cable tray or ladder rack in the equipment room (if supplied by
others)
• The increase in the capacity of the mains power supply (if required)
• The increase in the capacity of the standby mains power supply (if required)
• The completion of any civil works on the site (for example, new or modified
accommodation, new access road, etc.)
• Reinforcement of site floor to accommodate load of site equipment (if required)
• The position in which each piece of equipment will occupy on the floor has been marked
and agreed
• All the equipment has been delivered to site and placed in their final positions by the
transportation company
For full instructions and guidelines please refer to Motorola Standards and Guidelines for
Communications Sites, R56, Document number 68P81089E50.

Equipment Cabinet Installation


This section provides procedures for permanently mounting the EBTS equipment cabinets within
a site. The Equipment Cabinet Installation section contains the procedures listed in the following
table.

Table 4-7 Equipment Cabinet Installation Procedures

Section Page Description

Cabinet Bracing Considerations 4-26 Describes considerations on properly bracing cabinets


Access Considerations 4-27 Describes considerations for access to cabinets during servicing
Cabinet Position Considerations 4-27 Describes considerations and mounting procedures for cabinets

This section of the installation procedures covers the EBTS equipment cabinet. It does not refer
to the Power Supply rack or battery rack. Refer to the manufacturer’s installation manual for
information relating to these cabinets.

Cabinet Bracing Considerations

The EBTS equipment cabinet is self-supporting. In seismically active areas, additional bracing of
the cabinet may be required to prevent it from tipping. However, the bracing hardware must be
locally procured. There are no specific procedures within this manual for bracing cabinets in
active seismic areas.

Always use appropriate lifting equipment and number of personnel whenever moving an EBTS
equipment cabinet to reduce the risk of tipping. A fully configured EBTS equipment cabinet
weighs approximately 276 kg (608 lbs). tipping can result in serious injury and extensive
equipment damage.

4 - 26 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Access Considerations
Allow at least 0.8 m (2.6’) of floor space in front of and 15 cm (6”) behind the cabinets to permit
access during installation. Although all maintenance, expansion, cabling, and antenna
connections can be performed from the front or top, space is required behind the cabinets for
proper air flow.

HVAC
Optional
0.91m(3')

Service Area 0.80m(2.6')

Power 1.55m(5')
Batteries Supply Cabinet
HVAC

Cabinet Equipment 0.60m(2')

Service Area 15cm(0.5')

Note: Double lines on above units indicate front of equipment.


TEBTS003
101701LHE

Figure 4-6 Typical EBTS Site Layout

Although 15 cm is recommended for space behind the cabinet, this is a minimum requirement. It
is highly recommended that if possible around 60 cm be available to greatly ease the removal and
replacement of FRUs.

Cabinet Position Considerations


The following procedures describe how to mount the equipment cabinet in an EBTS site facility.
Be sure to read all of the procedures carefully.

The equipment cabinet must be secured to the floor for optimum stability.

Perform the following steps to properly install the equipment cabinet within the site facility:
1 Check that each piece of equipment, including the power supply equipment, has been
correctly positioned in the equipment room.
2 If using a HILTI nail gun to secure Equipment Cabinet to floor, secure cabinet as follows:

Follow all manufacturer’s instructions regarding protective gear and usage when using nail gun.

2.1 With the HILTI gun placed over the fixing holes in the base of each cabinet or rack,
shoot the stud through the baseplate hole into the concrete floor of the room. Make sure
that about 15 mm of threaded stud protrudes above the plate for the securing
nut/washer.

6866538D01-C 4 - 27
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

2.2 Start one nut and lock washer. Shoot additional studs into floor.
2.3 Secure remaining mounting locations using nuts and lock washers. Fully tighten all
mounting nuts securing cabinet to floor.
3 If using manually inserted concrete anchors to secure Equipment Cabinet to floor, secure
cabinet as follows:

Follow all manufacturer’s instructions regarding protective gear and usage when using concrete
nails and hammers.

3.1 Measure the mounting location for the first cabinet in the row.
Refer to the cabinet footprint(s) located in “Site Planning” on page 4-1.
3.2 Carefully mark the mounting holes with a pencil, as indicated on the appropriate
cabinet footprint.
3.3 Drill the marked mounting holes to the appropriate depth of the mounting hardware
with a hammer drill and bit.
3.4 Insert an anchor into the drilled hole. If necessary, tap the anchor into place using a
hammer.
3.5 Remove the four screws securing the bottom kick panel to the front and back of the
cabinet. Remove the kick panel and set aside during installation.

Always use the appropriate lifting equipment and numbers of personnel whenever moving an
EBTS equipment cabinet to reduce the risk of tipping. A fully configured EBTS equipment
cabinet weighs approximately 275 kg (600 lbs). tipping can result in serious injury and extensive
equipment damage.

3.6 Carefully move the cabinet into the position indicated by the holes in the floor.
3.7 Adjust and level the cabinet as necessary to position the cabinet mounting holes with
the pre-drilled holes.
3.8 Secure the cabinet to the site floor with the locally procured mounting hardware.
4 Check that none of the cables within the EBTS cabinet and the power supply equipment are
damaged.

Expansion Considerations
Intercabinet cabling between Prime and Expansion cabinets is manufactured to predetermined
lengths. This requires that a Prime cabinet and its complimentary Expansion cabinet be ganged
together using the hardware provided with each Expansion cabinet. Instructions for all
intercabinet cabling is provided in Chapter 5, “Interconnection and Cabling”. Instructions for the
Phasing Harness is provided in Chapter 10, “RF Distribution System (RFDS)”.

4 - 28 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Power Supply Equipment Installation

Power supply equipment and any battery back-up systems are not manufactured by Motorola.
Consult the manufacturer’s instruction manual and other pertinent documentation for installing a
power supply rack and battery systems. Any local regulations shall be adhered to when installing
power supply equipment or battery equipment.

External Cabling Connections


This section describes the external cabling connections that connect to the equipment cabinet. The
individual cabling procedures are listed below.

Table 4-8 External Cabling Connection Procedures

Procedure Page Description

EBTS Junction Panel 4-29 Connection of ground cabling to equipment


Cabinet Ground Connections 4-30 Connection of ground cabling to equipment
-48 VDC Power Connections 4-31 Connection of -48 VDC power from the power supply
equipment to Equipment Cabinet
Base Radio Antennas 4-34 Connection of antennas to Equipment Cabinet
GPS Antennas 4-34 Connection of GPS antennas to Equipment Cabinet
Alarm System Cabling 4-35 Connection of site and power supply equipment alarm
connections to the EAS
X.21, E1 Cabling 4-35 Connection of card interface and settings made on customer
side of demarcation point

The equipment cabinet is shipped with all cabling within the cabinet factory-installed. If
necessary, refer to Chapter 5, “Interconnection and Cabling”, for cabling within the cabinet.

EBTS Junction Panel


(See Figure 4-7.) Various cabling from the equipment cabinet to external assets is made via the
EBTS Junction Panel located at the top-rear of the equipment cabinet. The Junction Panel is
accessed from the front or rear of the cabinet.

Depending on system configuration, not all connector locations on Junction Panel are populated.

6866538D01-C 4 - 29
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In

Ethernet
5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1

Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2


/RX1-In /RX2-In

User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3

TEBTS080
101701LHE

Figure 4-7 Junction Panel (Top View)

Cabinet Ground Connections


Cabinet grounding wires may have been installed prior to cabinet installation. If so, follow the
instructions below. If grounding wires have not yet been installed, refer to the “Grounding
Requirements” on page 4-11.
Single-point ground method (where each cabinet or rack is grounded to master ground using its
own ground wire) shall be used. Equipment cabinet shall use green (or green-yellow) insulated
wire with a minimum size of 35 mm2 CSA (#2 AWG) for ground wire.

Where specified wire size is not available, next-larger available wire size shall be used.

During installation of cabinet ground wires, be sure to check any factory-installed internal ground
connections for tightness.

Equipment Cabinet Grounding


On the Equipment Cabinet, site ground connects to the M10 stud located on the Rack Ground Bus
bar (junction panel). The internal ground bus bar is attached to the mounting brackets of each
equipment within the cabinet; as such it provides the equipment a low-impedance common
ground that is free from ground loops.
The internal ground bus bar is located on the inside left-side (as viewed from the rear) of the
equipment cabinet. Throughout the length of the internal ground bus bar, M6 threaded holes are
available for ground connections.
Perform the following steps to ground the equipment cabinet to the site Master Ground Bus bar.
1 Strip the end of the wire to be connected to the cabinet Rack Ground Bus bar (junction panel).
2 Using an appropriate tool, attach a crimp lug onto the cabinet ground wire. Make certain lug
is securely fastened to wire.
3 Using the M10 nut provided, secure the cabinet ground wire to the M10 stud located on the
Rack Ground Bus bar (junction panel).
4 Make sure that the other end of the cabinet ground wire is routed to the Master Ground Bus
Bar.
5 Strip the end of the wire for connection to the site Master Ground Bus bar.

4 - 30 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

6 Using an appropriate tool, attach a dual-hole crimp lug onto the wire. Make certain lug is
securely fastened to wire.
7 Secure the ground wire lug to the site Master Ground Bus bar using the appropriate tools and
hardware.

Power Supply Equipment Grounding


Ground the power supply equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and any
applicable local regulations.

Battery System Grounding


Ground the battery cabinet (if used) in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and any
applicable local regulations.

Ground Connections Check


Perform the following procedure to ensure adequacy of cabinet-to-facility ground (earth)
connections:
1 Install the earth cable between the building earth and the earth bond stud on the EBTS cabinet.
2 With a Milliohmmeter, check that the earth connection between the EBTS Cabinet and the
building earth in the room is < 1.0 Ω.
3 In accordance with power supply equipment manufacturer’s instructions, install the earth
cable between the building earth and the earth bond stud on the 230 VAC/-48 VDC power
supply equipment chassis.
4 With a Milliohmmeter, check that the earth connection between the power supply equipment
chassis and the building earth in the room is < 1.0 Ω.

-48 VDC Power Connections


All -48 VDC power supply connections are made between the power supply equipment and the
equipment cabinet. A readily accessible power disconnect device (e.g., circuit breaker) for the
EBTS should be incorporated into the fixed wiring.
The Equipment Cabinet requires two power feeds to provide the operating power. Two -48 VDC
wires from the A and B sides of the -48 VDC Equipment Cabinet breaker panel are typically
connected to individual breakers on the power supply. Similarly, two DC return wires from the A
and B sides of the Equipment Cabinet breaker panel RETURN connections are connected to the
power supply. This provides two separate power feeds to the Equipment Cabinet. Figure 4-8
shows a rear view of the Power Distribution Panel.

STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3 RFS1&RFS2 BR3&BR4 BR1&BR2

B -48Vdc A B RETURN A

TEBTS005
111998LLN

Figure 4-8 Equipment Cabinet Power Distribution Panel (Rear View)

6866538D01-C 4 - 31
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

The equipment cabinet distributes the -48 VDC through individual power circuits for each
module in the cabinet. These circuits are wired from the circuit breaker panel in the cabinet.
Power wiring for circuit breakers in the equipment cabinet is accessed from the rear of the cabinet
on the breaker panel. The A-side is on the left and the B-side is on the right, when viewed from
the front.

Determining Power Connection Wire Size

Wire size recommendations contained herein reflect Motorola engineering requirements for
proper system operation. Local regulations shall be adhered to in any case and shall supersede any
other specifications in this manual, where applicable.

Table 4-9 lists the required wire sizes for various installations. The “loop length” refers to the
combined length of the -48 VDC lead and the DC return lead. For example, a cabinet which needs
4.87 m (16’) of wire between the power supply equipment and equipment cabinets has a total loop
length of 9.75 m (32’).
For a standard installation, the equipment cabinet is located adjacent to the power supply
equipment with a cable loop length less than 10.67 m (35’).

Table 4-9 Power Connections Wire Size

Loop Length Wire Size

15.2 m (50’) or less 16 mm2 CSA (#5 AWG)


15.2 - 24.8 m (50 - 80’) 25 mm2 CSA (#4 AWG)
24.8 - 36.6 m (80 - 120’) 35 mm2 CSA (#2 AWG)

Wire used shall not be smaller than 16 mm2 CSA (#5 AWG). Cable loop voltage drop shall not
exceed 500 mV for cabling of the -48 VDC and DC return leads.
Blue is the colour recommended for -48 VDC wires. However, if the wire is not colour-coded,
mark these leads with a coloured tracer on each end.

Equipment Cabinet -48 VDC Power Connections


Perform -48 VDC power source-to-equipment cabinet wiring as follows:

Make sure all power to the power supply equipment is off to prevent accidental contact with high
energy and injury to personnel.

1 Using appropriate-gauge wire, route two runs of bulk wiring between -48 VDC A and B side
connections on Equipment Cabinet and power supply -48 VDC connections.
Make certain the wire runs are properly routed through cabinets and cable tray assembly,
allowing adequate slack.

4 - 32 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

2 Connect the wires to power supply -48 VDC output in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions and any applicable local regulations.
3 On the equipment Cabinet Breaker Panel, strip and insert free end of wire connected to
Breaker 1A into A-side terminal block. (See Figure 4-8.) Secure the connection using the
circuit breaker captive screw.
4 On the equipment Cabinet Breaker Panel, strip and insert free end of wire connected to
Breaker 1B into B-side terminal block. (See Figure 4-8.) Secure the connection using the
circuit breaker captive screw.

DC Return Connections
The equipment cabinet requires two wires for the DC return leads. Perform equipment cabinet
DC return wiring as follows:

Make sure all power to the power supply equipment is off to prevent accidental contact with high
energy and injury to personnel.

1 Using appropriate-gauge wire, route two runs of bulk wiring between A and B side RETURN
connections on equipment cabinet and power supply return connections.
Make certain the wire runs are properly routed through cabinets and cable tray assembly,
allowing adequate slack.
2 Connect the wires to power supply -48 VDC return in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions and any applicable local regulations.
3 On the equipment Cabinet Breaker Panel, strip and insert free end of wire connected to A-side
return into the A-side RETURN terminal block. (See Figure 4-8.) Secure the connection using
the circuit breaker captive screw.
4 On the equipment Cabinet Breaker Panel, strip and insert free end of wire connected to B-side
return into the B-side RETURN terminal block. (See Figure 4-8.) Secure the connection using
the circuit breaker captive screw.

Replacement of the Fuse Trip panel (Breaker Panel)


To replace the Breaker Panel through the front door do the following:
1 Turn off the external power supply.

Make sure all power to the power supply equipment is off to prevent accidental contact with high
energy and injury to personnel.

2 Remove the top of the cabinet and disconnect all cables from the rear of the breaker panel.
3 Remove the breaker panel.

6866538D01-C 4 - 33
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Base Radio Antennas


The following procedures describe connecting Base Radio antennas to the equipment cabinet RF
Distribution System (RFDS). The antenna leads should be dropped above the EBTS equipment
cabinet as per the site plan. The following procedures assume the Base Radio antennas have been
installed and that the Equipment Cabinet RFDS is properly configured. (If required, refer to
Chapter 5, “Interconnection and Cabling” for cabling diagrams for RF cabling between the
Equipment Cabinet modules, and RFDS cabling.)
Make sure the antenna cables are properly marked. Observe the direction of corresponding
antennas while correlating the azimuth to the tagged antenna cable. Be sure to document this
information for future use.

The equipment cabinet uses female N-type connectors on the antenna ports. These connectors
have gold- plated centre conductors and trimetal-plated outer shells. It is recommended that
mating antenna feed connectors use correspondingly matching metal plating.

4 Channel Cavity Combining RFDS Sites


(See Figure 4-9) Identify and tag all antenna cables designated for connection to the equipment
cabinet. Note that for duplexed antenna configurations, the transmit antenna is also used as a
receive antenna giving one antenna and antenna cable less in the system.
For EBTS systems with expansion racks, there are two antennas that are both used for
transmitting and receiving.
All antenna cabling must enter through the top of the cabinets. Extension cables for the antenna
feedlines must be locally procured. Superflex™ 1/2” cable is the recommended extension cable.

RX1 DIVERSITY RECEIVE


ANTENNA CABLE

RX2 DIVERSITY RECEIVE


TX ANTENNA CABLES ANTENNA CABLE

In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In

Ethernet
5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1

Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2


/RX1-In /RX2-In

User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3

TEBTS022B

Figure 4-9 RFDS Connections

GPS Antennas
The Site Controller uses an internal GPS receiver to be used to provide synchronisation and
timing signals.
The GPS interface on the controller is connected to the GPS port of the junction panel via a
factory installed cable assembly.

4 - 34 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

GPS extension cables (if required) are not provided and must be locally procured. A SuperflexTM
1/2” cable assembly is recommended.

Alarm System Cabling


The Environmental Alarm System (EAS) handles all alarms for the site. Site alarm wiring enters
from the top of the equipment cabinet via the junction panel. The User Alarm/Control circuits and
System Alarm/Control wiring circuits to respective 50-pin, connectors P9 User Alarm/Control
and P10 System Alarm/Control.
Only P9 User Alarm/Control is connected to the Junction Panel at the top of the cabinet. Various
system (internal) alarm circuits are interfaced to the EAS via connectors P5 through P8. The EAS
rear panel connectors are shown in Figure 4-10.
Five sets of change-over relay contacts are provided for controlling external equipment. The
relays are rated 50 VDC @ 250 mA. (If switching requirement exceeds rating, the relay contact
can be used to actuate a suitable power relay.)
Any device connected to the EBTS shall comply with requirements specified for SELV circuits
per EN60950.

P9 P5 P6 P10

-48V RTN CONTROLLER A CONTROLLER B CONTROL RF1


Motorola PARALLEL PARALLEL
USER ALARM/CONTROL SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL
ENVIRONMENTAL
ALARM SYSTEM
RF2 RF3
Tanapa No.: CLN1685

INPUT -48V , 0.5A

P1 P3 P7 P8

Figure 4-10 EAS Rear Panel Connectors

The USER ALARM/CONTROL (P9) and SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL (P10) connectors are
typically connected to the site alarm wiring using a punchblock.
The site alarm wiring should have been accomplished during pre-installation.
The EAS connector pinouts and functions is described in “EAS Alarm/Control Connector
Pinouts” on page 9-6.

X.21, E1 Cabling
The X.21 interface connects to a cabinet “transition cable” (P/N 3083751X06) that converts and
extends the connector on the TSC to the 15-pin D-type connector used for the site X.21/V11
communications. For the E1 120Ω Site Controller, an extension cable (P/N 3082468Y02) is
connected to the TSC.
The opposite ends of these cables are mounted to the junction panel.
Connect the X.21 transition cable to the site Network Terminating Unit.

6866538D01-C 4 - 35
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

The Network Termination Unit shall provide the necessary isolation between the X.21/E1
interface and the network, and should be approved for use by the appropriate agency in the end
user country.

Table 4-10 E1 Connector on Junction Panel

Pin No. Function

1 Transmit
9
3 Receive
11

Table 4-11 X.21 Connector

Signal Pin No. Function

R 4 Receive Data
11
T 2 Transmit Data
9
C 3 Control
10
I 5 Indication
12
S 6 Timing
(Signal Element)
13
GND 8 Ground

If the cable is not terminated to the Network Terminating Unit, do not remove the supplied caplug
and retaining bag from the D-type connector on the X.21 cable or 120 Ω cable. The caplug is
required on the connector if it is not terminated to comply with the requirements of EMC
Directive 89/336/EEC.

4 - 36 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Final Checkout

Final Checkout Setup


The following procedures should be performed after installation of the EBTS is complete. This
Final Checkout procedure ensures the proper operation of the EBTS.
1 (See Figure 4-11). On the Equipment Cabinet, set all circuit breakers to the OFF position.
2 On the power supply equipment, set all circuit breakers to the OFF position in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.

BR1 BR3 RFS1 RFS3 CTRL A BR2 BR4 RFS2 EAS/IMU CTRL B

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

25A 25A 3A 3A 7.5A 25A 25A 3A 7.5A 7.5A

TEBTS004
120496JNM

Figure 4-11 Equipment Cabinet Circuit Breaker Panel

Equipment Power-Up
Perform procedures in specified sequence. Procedures are arranged to prevent successive
equipment damage in the case of an equipment or installation defect.
Make certain all switches on the EBTS Equipment Modules are set to OFF before proceeding.
Turn switches to on only when directed in following procedures.

Powering the Power Supply Equipment


Use this procedure to apply power to the power supply equipment.
1 Check connections at power supply equipment. Verify that all connections are secure and
make good contact. Make any necessary adjustments.
2 Power-up the power supply equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3 Using a digital voltmeter (DVM), verify a voltage level between -44 VDC and -60 VDC at the
-48 VDC (hot) terminals and return terminals of the power supply equipment.
4 Adjust in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions as required.
5 As applicable, set the battery disconnect switch (or equivalent) on the power supply
equipment to CONNECT.
6 The batteries should begin charging.
7 Proceed to "Powering the Equipment Cabinet" instructions.

6866538D01-C 4 - 37
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Powering the Equipment Cabinet


1 In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, set the power supply equipment circuit
breakers that supply power to the Equipment Cabinet to the ON position.
This supplies power to the A and B sides of the Equipment Cabinet.
2 Verify a voltage level between -44 VDC and -60 VDC across DC return and the -48 VDC (hot)
terminals A and B on the power distribution panel in the Equipment Cabinet.
3 Verify a voltage of less than 1.0 V between the DC return and chassis ground of the Equipment
Cabinet.
4 Proceed to "Equipment Cabinet Circuit Breakers" instructions.

Equipment Cabinet Circuit Breakers


Breaker panels are always shipped fully configured regardless of whether the equipment for the
controlling circuit breaker is installed. This procedure requires all breakers to be sequentially set
to the ON position, in the order specified, to prevent the triggering of the breaker alarm indication.
All steps must be performed in this procedure to prevent unwanted alarm indications.

EAS/Site Controller Circuit Breakers


1 (See Figure 4-12). On the Environmental Alarm System (EAS), set POWER switch to ON.
2 (See Figure 4-11). On the Equipment Cabinet breaker panel, set the EAS/IMU breaker to ON.
Verify that the Power On LED on the EAS module is lit.
3 On the Equipment Cabinet breaker panel, set the CTRL A circuit breaker to ON.

ENVIRONMENTAL ALARM SYSTEM

te

ct t
e
er

A pu
ra

A ut
iv

iv
w

ct
pe

ut
Po

In
O

O
Power

iSC402_EAS2

Figure 4-12 EAS Front Panel

Base Radio/Receiver Multicoupler Circuit Breakers


1 On the Equipment Cabinet breaker panel, set the BR1 circuit breaker to ON.
2 Repeat above step for additional base radios BR2 through BR4, as applicable.
3 On the Equipment Cabinet breaker panel, set the RFS1 breaker to ON.
4 On the Equipment Cabinet breaker panel, set the RFS2 breaker to ON.

4 - 38 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Site Controller Power-Up


1 Verify that the CTRL A circuit breaker is set to ON.
2 Set the front panel Power breaker/switch on Site Controller A to the ON position.
3 On Site Controller front panel, verify normal indication status of the indicators listed in Table
8-2 and shown in Figure 8-1.
4 Proceed to Chapter 6, “Configuration and Testing”.

Redundant Site Controller Power-Up

The support for redundant site controller is a system release feature. Please check in you system
release documentation whether or not the feature is supported. The redundant SC MUST be
switched OFF and remain switched OFF during operation with software releases that do not
support the redundant TSC feature. Using a redundant SC without supporting software will cause
BR's to communicate/register with the incorrect SC and will also cause site link problems.

For system releases that supports the redundant Site Controller follow the following procedure.
1 Verify that the CTRL B circuit breaker is set to ON.
2 Set the front panel Power breaker/switch on Site Controller B to the ON position.
3 On Site Controller front panel, verify normal indication status of the indicators listed in Table
8-2 and shown in Figure 8-1.
4 Proceed to Chapter 6, “Configuration and Testing”.

6866538D01-C 4 - 39
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Auto Tune Combiner Power-Up


1 (See Figure 4-13). On the Equipment Cabinet, set the RFS3 circuit breaker to ON.

CAVITY COMBINER

CAVITY COMBINER

TEBTS081
091299JNM

Figure 4-13 Cavity Combiner Front Panel

4 - 40 6866538D01-C
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

Planned Maintenance Information


In order to reduce the probability of failure of the EBTS, a number of items require periodic
maintenance. For further information see Appendix D.
• Fans in Power Supply and Power Amplifier:
Should be replaced if noisy. Please contact your Motorola Service Representative.
• Fans in TSC:
Should be replaced if noisy, but if the EBTS is operated in high ambient temperature (45 °C
or above) fans should be replaced every 4-5 years. Please contact your Motorola Service
Representative.
• TSC Backup Battery:
Should be replaced every 8 years. Please contact your Motorola Service Representative.

6866538D01-C 4 - 41
February 2005
EBTS Site Preparation and Hardware Installation

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

4 - 42 6866538D01-C
February 2005
5

5Interconnection and Cabling

Receiver Cabling
Receiver cabling refers to the receive cable connections between the RF Distribution System
(RFDS) and the Base Radios receivers.
Table 5-1 and Figure 5-1 represent 4-channel, diversity configuration.
.

Table 5-1 Receiver Cabling (Cavity Combining RFDS)

Index Part Number From To Notes

1 3082571Y05 Junction Panel RX In Adapter SMA/SMA For prime racks only.


(underside) Cable from RX 3 In is reserved for CMU.
1A 5809585Y01 For prime racks only.
Adapter SMA/SMA.
1B 3082571Y04 Adapter SMA/SMA Input connector on Receiver For prime racks only.
Multicoupler
2 3013943A38 Output connectors on RX connector on BR 3 and BR 4 Unused output ports on Receiver
Receiver Multicoupler Multicoupler are terminated with 50 Ω
load.
3 3013943A41 Output connectors on RX connector on BR 1 and BR 2 Unused output ports on Receiver
Receiver Multicouplers Multicoupler are terminated with 50 Ω
load.
5 3082571Y05 RX In on Junction Panel Input connector on Receiver For expansion racks only.
Multicoupler
6 3082571Y02 EX connector on Receiver RX Out on Junction Panel For prime racks only.
Multicoupler
7 3013942M38 RX Out on Junction Panel RX Out on Junction Panel of For expansion racks only.
of prime racks expansion racks

6866538D01-C 5-1
February 2005
TO JUNCTION PANEL
OF EXPANSION RACK

5-2
7 RX1 IN
7 RX2 IN
RX3 IN In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In
1
Ethernet
5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1

5 RX2 IN 1 RX2 IN Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out


/RX1-In
Tx2 Out
/RX2-In
Alarm RF2

User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3

5 RX1 IN 1 RX1 IN
LOCATED ON TOP OF PRIME RACK
ON JUNCTION PANEL 6 RX2 OUT
OF EXPANSION RACK
6 RX1 OUT
Interconnection and Cabling

ON JUNCTION PANEL
OF PRIME RACK
STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3 RFS1 RFS2 BR3 BR4 BR1 BR2

B -48Vdc A B RETURN A

1A 1A

1B 1B

-48V RTN CONTROLLER A CONTROLLER B CONTROL RF1


Motorola PARALLEL PARALLEL
USER ALARM/CONTROL SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL
ENVIRONMENTAL
ALARM SYSTEM
Tanapa No.: CLN1685 RF2 RF3

INPUT -48V , 0.5A

GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
X.21
TO BR4, RX1 -48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1 10/100B-T
2 GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
2 TO BR4, RX1 BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1

2 TO BR3, RX1
RX 3

2 TO BR3, RX1
GROUN AC

TO BR2, RX1 RX 2
3
DC

3 TO BR2, RX1 RX 1 RE
BLACK

TO BR1, RX1 BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED


3 EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

3 TO BR1, RX1 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3

GROUN AC

2 TO BR4, RX2 RX 2

2 TO BR4, RX2 DC

Figure 5-1 Receiver Cabling Diagram


RX 1 RE
BLACK
TO BR3, RX2 BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
2 EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

2 TO BR3, RX2
5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

3 TO BR2, RX2
3 TO BR2, RX2
3 TO BR1, RX2
RX 3
3 TO BR1, RX2
GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN


FOR EXPANSION RACKS FOR PRIMARY RACKS
RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

TEBTS026B

February 2005
6866538D01-C
Interconnection and Cabling

Transmit Power Out Cabling


Transmit power output cabling refers to the cables that route the Base Radio RF output to the
transmit input of the RF Distribution System (RFDS) and transmit cabling from the RFDS to the
Junction Panel TX OUT connector. It also includes any transmit cables that are not included under
the RFDS part number.
Table 5-2 identifies and Figure 5-2 shows the transmit power out cabling for a 4-channel cavity
combining RFDS.

Power monitor cabling is not shown in the following diagrams. Refer to Cabinet Alarm Harness
Connections paragraph for power monitor cabling.

Table 5-2 Transmit Power Out Cabling (4-Channel Cavity Combining RFDS)

Index Part Number From To Notes

1 3013942C18 Base Radio 1 PA Out Index 1A


1A 3082118X10 Index 1 Cavity Combiner TX isolator Tx
input port (CH1)
2 3013942C18 Base Radio 2 PA Out Index 2A
2A 3082118X10 Index 2 Cavity Combiner TX isolator Tx
input port (CH2)
3 3013942C18 Base Radio 3 PA Out Index 3A
3A 3082118X11 Index 3 Cavity Combiner TX isolator Tx
input port (CH3)
4 3013942C18 Base Radio 4 PA Out Index 4A
4A 3082118X11 Index 4 Cavity Combiner TX isolator Tx
input port (CH4)
6 3082118X22 Cavity Combiner Master/Slave Ant APM 1 In port For prime racks only.
port
7 0102705U11 Cavity Combiner Master Ant port Cavity Combiner Slave Ant port Interconnection harness
8 3082118X24 APM 2 Out Junction Panel TX Out 2
(underside)
9 3082118X24 APM 1 Out Junction Panel TX Out 1
(underside)
10 3082118X08 ATCC Ant port of expansion rack APM 2 In For expansion racks only.

6866538D01-C 5-3
February 2005
Interconnection and Cabling

In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In

Ethernet
5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1

Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2


/RX1-In /RX2-In

User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3

LOCATED ON TOP OF CABINET

FROM
EXPANSION RACK
ATCC
9
STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3 RFS1 RFS2 BR3 BR4 BR1 BR2

B -48Vdc A B RETURN A

10

4A

6 -48V RTN
Motorola
CONTROLLER A CONTROLLER B CONTROL RF1
PARALLEL PARALLEL SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL
ENVIRONMENTAL USER ALARM/CONTROL
ALARM SYSTEM
Tanapa No.: CLN1685 RF2 RF3

INPUT -48V , 0.5A

GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1 10/100B-T

GPS

In Out Out In
2A -48V RTN
BAT
T1/E1

1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3


SITE REF OUT

2 1
X.21
10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1

APM 2 APM 1 RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

1A 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

4
3A RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

3
RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

2
RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

TEBTS102B

Figure 5-2 Transmit Power Out Cabling Diagram

5-4 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Interconnection and Cabling

Chassis Grounding
Chassis grounding refers to the ground strap connections between the equipment modules within
the equipment cabinet and the cabinet frame.
Table 5-3 identifies and Figure 5-3 shows the ground straps.

Table 5-3 Ground Straps

Index Part Number From To Notes

1 3082000X12 Ground bus bar connection Ground stud on EAS Strap connects to bus bar using M6 bolt
on equipment cabinet and lockwasher.
2 3082000X12 Ground bus bar connection Ground stud on Site Controller Strap connects to bus bar using M6 bolt
on equipment cabinet and lockwasher.
3 3082000X05 Ground bus bar connection Ground stud on Base Radio Strap connects to bus bar using M6 bolt
on equipment cabinet and lockwasher.
4 3082000X08 Ground bus bar connection Ground stud on LNA RX Tray Strap connects to bus bar using M6 bolt
on equipment cabinet and lockwasher.
5 3082000X24 Ground bus bar connection Ground stud on Junction Panel Strap connects to bus bar using M6 bolt
on equipment cabinet and lockwasher.
6 3082000X12 Ground bus bar connection Ground stud inside the Cavity Strap connects to bus bar using M6 bolt
on equipment cabinet Combiner and lockwasher.
7 3082000X12 Ground bus bar connection Strap connects to bus bar using M6 bolt
on equipment cabinet and lockwasher.
Reserved for Filter Tray or CMU.
Ground bus bar P/N 3182602Y03
Nut M6 for Ground P/N 0212022A04

6866538D01-C 5-5
February 2005
Interconnection and Cabling

In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In

Ethernet
5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1

Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2


/RX1-In /RX2-In

User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3

LOCATED ON TOP OF CABINET

STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3 RFS1 RFS2 BR3 BR4 BR1 BR2

5 B -48Vdc A B RETURN A

TO GROUND STUD 7
6
INSIDE THE ATCC

4
-48V RTN CONTROLLER A CONTROLLER B CONTROL RF1

1
Motorola PARALLEL PARALLEL
USER ALARM/CONTROL SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL
ENVIRONMENTAL
ALARM SYSTEM
Tanapa No.: CLN1685 RF2 RF3

INPUT -48V , 0.5A

GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
BA
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1 10/100B-T
RTN
GPS
GPS

2
T
SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1

RX 3

2 GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

3 RX 1

BLACK
RE

AC WITH BATTERY REVERT


EX
BLACK
RED
EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

3 RX 1

BLACK
RE

AC WITH BATTERY REVERT


EX
BLACK
RED
EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

3 RX
RX 1
1

BLACK
RE

AC WITH BATTERY REVERT


EX
BLACK
RED
EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

3 RX 1
1

BLACK
RE

AC WITH BATTERY REVERT


EX
BLACK
RED
EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

TEBTS031B

Figure 5-3 Chassis Grounding Diagram

5-6 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Interconnection and Cabling

DC Power Connections
DC power connections refer to power cabling between the Equipment Cabinet Power Distribution
Panel and the modules within the cabinet. Table 5-4 identifies and Figure 5-4 shows the DC power
connections.

Table 5-4 DC Power Connections

Index Part Number From To Notes

1 3082082X06 RFS3 connector on Power Mate-N-Lok power connectors on


Distribution Panel ATCC Logic Controller
2A 3082129X10 RFS1& RFS2 connector on Mate-N-Lok power connectors on For prime racks only.
Power Distribution Panel LNA I/O Board. See Detail A in Figure 5-4.
Multi-circuit Y-cable assembly.
One leg of cable is reserved for
CMU/Duplexer connection.
2B 3082129X07 RFS1& RFS2 connector on Mate-N-Lok power connectors on For expansion racks only.
Power Distribution Panel LNA I/O Board See Detail A in Figure 5-4.
3 3083609X04 CTRL A/EAS IMU Mate-N-Lok power connector on Multi-circuit Y-cable assembly
connector on Power EAS and Mate-N-Lok power
Distribution Panel connector on Site Controller A
4 3082082X05 CTRL B connector on Power Mate-N-Lok power connector on
Distribution Panel Site Controller A
5 3083803X06 BR3&BR4 connector on DC connectors on BR 3 and BR 4 Multi-circuit Y-cable assembly
Power Distribution Panel
6 3083803X07 BR1&BR2 connector on DC connectors on BR 1 and BR 2 Multi-circuit Y-cable assembly
Power Distribution Panel

6866538D01-C 5-7
February 2005
Interconnection and Cabling

In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In

Ethernet
5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1

Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2


/RX1-In /RX2-In

User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3

2A
2B

STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3


FS RFS1 RFS2 BR3 BR4 BR1 BR2

B -48Vdc A B RETURN A

3 2A
4

2A
2B

LOCATED IN FRONT OF CABINET


6
-48V RTN
Motorola
ENVIRONMENTAL
ALARM SYSTEM
Tanapa No.: CLN1685
USER ALARM/CONTROL
CONTROLLER A
PARALLEL
CONTROLLER B
PARALLEL
CONTROL

RF2
RF1

RF3
SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL A
INPUT -48V , 0.5A

GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1 10/100B-T

GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE

2A BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT


EX
BLACK
RED
EX

2B ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A PA IN

(REF)
ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

A RX 1
DC

RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

(-48V INPUT)
RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

I/O BOARD (TOP VIEW)

TEBTS034B

Figure 5-4 DC Power Connections Diagram

5-8 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Interconnection and Cabling

5 MHz/1 PPS and GPS Antenna


Cabling
Table 5-5 identifies and Figure 5-5 shows the 5 MHz/1 PPS cabling and GPS antenna feed
cabling.

Table 5-5 5 MHz/1 PPS Cabling

Index Part Number From To Notes

1 5882741Y02 50 Ω termination.
2 3082363Y07 Junction Panel 5MHz/1PPS Out 1 Base Radio 1 5MHz/1PPS connector For prime racks only.
connector (underside) Terminate with 50 Ω loads if no
expansion at the Junction Panel.
3 3013943N29 BR-to-BR 5MHz/1PPS link (via BNC Y-adapters) Full BR complement shown.
Index 3 and Y-adapters are
secured to side rail for empty
rack positions. Place ESD Cap
(p/n 3883441X02).
4 3013943N29 Base Radio 4 5MHz/1PPS Site Ref Out 1 connector on Site
connector (via BNC Y-adapter) Controller A (via BNC Y-adapter)
5 3013943N29 Site Ref Out 1 connector on TSC A Site Ref Out 1 connector on TSC B
(via BNC Y-adapter) (via BNC Y-adapter)
6 3082363Y07 Junction Panel 5MHz/1PPS In 1 Base Radio 1 5MHz/1PPS connector For expansion racks only.
connector (underside)
7 3013943N45 Junction Panel 5MHz/1PPS Out 1 Junction Panel 5MHz/1PPS In 1 of For expansion racks only.
of prime rack expansion rack
11 3012028P31 Junction Panel GPS A GPS connector on Site Controller A
12 3012028P31 Junction Panel GPS B GPS connector on Site Controller B Redundant Site Controller
All cable-to-cable connections use BNC Y-adapters (P/N 5882669Y01), which are connected to the module
connectors or cables, as shown.

Each 5MHz/1PPS line of the TSC supports up to 12 Base Radios. At the beginning and the end of each line,
50 Ω terminations are needed.

6866538D01-C 5-9
February 2005
Interconnection and Cabling

1 In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In

Ethernet Ethernet
5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1 5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1

Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2 Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2
/RX1-In /RX2-In /RX1-In /RX2-In

User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3 User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3

LOCATED ON TOP OF CABINET LOCATED ON TOP OF CABINET

STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3 RFS1 RFS2 BR3 BR4 BR1 BR2 STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3 RFS1 RFS2 BR3 BR4 BR1 BR2

B -48Vdc A B RETURN A B -48Vdc A B RETURN A

6
12

11

-48V RTN CONTROLLER A CONTROLLER B CONTROL RF1


Motorola PARALLEL PARALLEL
USER ALARM/CONTROL SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL
ENVIRONMENTAL RF#3
ALARM SYSTEM
Tanapa No.: CLN1685 RF2 RF3

INPUT -48V , 0.5A

GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1 10/100B-T

GPS

5
SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1

RX 3 RX 3

4
GROUN AC GROUN AC

RX 2 RX 2

RX 1 RE 1 DC

RX 1
1 RE
DC

BLACK BLACK

BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3 RX 3

3 3
GROUN AC GROUN AC

RX 2 RX 2

DC DC

RX 1 RX 1 RE
RE
BLACK BLACK

BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3 RX 3

3 3
AC GROUN AC
GROUN
RX 2 RX 2

DC DC

RX 1 RX 1 RE
RE
BLACK BLACK

BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA FB PA IN 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN
PA OUT

RX 3 RX 3

3 3
AC GROUN AC
GROUN
RX 2 RX 2

DC DC

RX 1 RX 1 RE
RE
BLACK BLACK

BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX EX EX

ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA FB PA IN 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN
PA OUT

PRIME EXPANSION
TEBTS032B

Figure 5-5 5 MHz/1 PPS Cabling Diagram

5 - 10 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Interconnection and Cabling

Ethernet Cabling
Table 5-6 identifies and Figure 5-6 shows the Ethernet cabling.

Table 5-6 Ethernet Cabling

Index Part Number From To Notes

1 5882741Y02 50 Ω termination.
2 3082363Y07 Junction Panel Ethernet Base Radio 1 Ethernet connector For prime racks only.
(Grounded) connector (underside) (via BNC Y-adapter) Terminate with 50 Ω loads if no
expansion at the Junction Panel.
3 3013943N29 BR-to-BR Ethernet link (via BNC Y-adapters) Full BR complement shown. Index
3 and Y-adapters are secured to
side rail for empty rack positions.
Place ESD Cap (p/n 3883441X02).
4 3013943N29 Base Radio 4 Ethernet connector 10B2-1 connector on Site
(via BNC Y-adapter) Controller A (via BNC Y-adapter)
5 3013943N29 10B2-1 connector on TSC A (via 10B2-1 connector on TSC B (via
BNC Y-adapter) BNC Y-adapter)
6 3082363Y07 Junction Panel Ethernet Isolated Base Radio 1 Ethernet connector For expansion racks only.
Ground In connector (underside) (via BNC Y-adapter)
7 3013943N45 Junction Panel Ethernet Junction Panel Ethernet Isolated For expansion racks only.
(Grounded) connector on prime Ground In connector on expansion
rack rack
All cable-to-cable connections use BNC Y-adapters (P/N 5882669Y01), which are connected to the module
connectors or cables, as shown.

6866538D01-C 5 - 11
February 2005
Interconnection and Cabling

1
In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In

Ethernet Ethernet
5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1 5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1

Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2 Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2
/RX1-In /RX2-In /RX1-In /RX2-In

User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3 User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3

LOCATED ON TOP OF CABINET LOCATED ON TOP OF CABINET

STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3 RFS1 RFS2 BR3 BR4 BR1 BR2 STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3 RFS1 RFS2 BR3 BR4 BR1 BR2

B -48Vdc A B RETURN A B -48Vdc A B RETURN A

2 6

-48V RTN CONTROLLER A CONTROLLER B CONTROL RF1


Motorola PARALLEL PARALLEL
USER ALARM/CONTROL SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL
ENVIRONMENTAL
ALARM SYSTEM
Tanapa No.: CLN1685 RF2 RF3

INPUT -48V , 0.5A

GPS

-48V RTN
BAT
T1/E1

1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3


SITE REF OUT

2 1
4 X.21
10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1 10/100B-T

GPS

SITE REF OUT

5
T1/E1
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1

RX 3 RX 3

RX 2
GROUN AC
RX 2
GROUN AC

1
1
DC DC

RX 1 RX 1 RE
RE
BLACK BLACK

BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA FB PA IN 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN
PA OUT

RX 3
3 RX 3
3
AC GROUN AC
GROUN
RX 2 RX 2

DC DC

RX 1 RX 1 RE
RE
BLACK BLACK

BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED BLACK


BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA FB PA IN 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN
PA OUT OUT

RX 3
3 RX 3
3
AC GROUN AC
GROUN
RX 2 RX 2

DC DC

RX 1 RX 1 RE
RE
BLACK BLACK

BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED BLACK


BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA FB PA IN 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN
PA OUT OUT

RX 3
3 RX 3
3
AC GROUN AC
GROUN
RX 2 RX 2

DC DC

RX 1 RX 1 RE
RE
BLACK BLACK

BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED BLACK


BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA FB PA IN 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN
PA OUT OUT

PRIME EXPANSION
TEBTS033B

Figure 5-6 Ethernet Cabling Diagram

5 - 12 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Interconnection and Cabling

Site Controller/EAS Intercabling


Site Controller/EAS intercabling refers to the cabling between the Site Controller and the EAS
rear panel connectors. Table 5-7 identifies and Figure 5-7 shows the intercabling.

Table 5-7 Site Controller/EAS Intercabling

Index Part Number From To Notes

1 3083499X03 Parallel connector on TSC A Controller A Parallel connector on


EAS
2 3083499X03 Parallel connector on TSC B Controller B Parallel connector on
EAS
4 3013943N29 Site Ref Out 1 connector on TSC A Site Ref Out 1 connector on TSC B
5 3013943N29 10B2-1 connector on TSC A 10B2-1 connector on TSC B
6 3082505Y12 10/100B-T connector on TSC A 10/100B-T connector on TSC B
7 3013943N29 Redundant connector on TSC A Redundant connector on TSC B
8 3084225N48 T1/E1-1 connector on Site T1/E1-1 connector on Site E1 cabling.
Controller A Controller B
9 5882669Y01 BNC 50 Ω Y-Adapter
10 5882741Y02 50 Ω termination.

1
-48V RTN CONTROLLER A CONTROLLER B CONTROL RF1
MOTOROLA PARALLEL PARALLEL SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL
USER ALARM/CONTROL
ENVIRONMENTAL
ALARM SYSTEM RF2 RF3
Tanapa No.: CLN1685

INPUT -48V , 0.5A

GPS

SITE REF OUT


5
-48V RTN
BAT
T1/E1

1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1


X.21
10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1 10/100B-T
6
4
GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1 10/100B-T

8 7

10 9 TEBTS035_EAS2

Figure 5-7 Site Controller/EAS Cabling Diagram

6866538D01-C 5 - 13
February 2005
Interconnection and Cabling

E1 and X.21 Cabling


Table 5-8 identifies and Figure 5-8 shows the E1 and X.21 cabling.

Table 5-8 E1/X.21 cabling

Index Part Number From To Notes

1 3082468Y02 T1/E1-1 connector on Site E1-120/X.21 A connector on the E1 cabling.


Controller A Junction Panel
2 5882449V01 E1 cabling.
T-Adapter modular, 8-pin, 2-jack to 1-
plug.
3 3084225N48 T1/E1-1 connector on Site T1/E1-1 connector on Site Controller E1 cabling.
Controller B A Redundant Site Controller.
4 3083751X06 X.21 connector on Site E1-120/X.21 B connector on X.21 cabling.
Controller A and X.21 Junction Panel Multi-circuit Y-cable assembly.
connector on Site Controller B

5 - 14 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Interconnection and Cabling

In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In

Ethernet
5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1

Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2


/RX1-In /RX2-In

User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3

LOCATED ON TOP OF CABINET

STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3 RFS1 RFS2 BR3 BR4 BR1 BR2

B -48Vdc A B RETURN A

1 4

2
-48V RTN CONTROLLER A CONTROLLER B CONTROL RF1
Motorola PARALLEL PARALLEL
USER ALARM/CONTROL SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL
ENVIRONMENTAL
ALARM SYSTEM
Tanapa No.: CLN1685 RF2 RF3

INPUT -48V , 0.5A

GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1

3
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1 10/100B-T

GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

TEBTS-32_E1_X21

Figure 5-8 E1/X.21 Cabling Diagram

6866538D01-C 5 - 15
February 2005
Interconnection and Cabling

Cabinet Alarm Harness Connections


The cabinet alarm connections use multi-connector wiring harness assembly (P/N 3083813X05)
that provides for daisy-chain connection of the various modules to the EAS. Table 5-9 identifies
and Figure 5-9 shows the harness connecting points.

Table 5-9 Cabinet Alarm Harness Connections

Part Number3083813X05
Index Notes
Connecting Point

1 Alarm connector on Base Radio 1


2 Alarm connector on Base Radio 2
3 Alarm connector on Base Radio 3
4 Alarm connector on Base Radio 4
5 Alarm connector on ATTC
6 LNA power monitor DB-9 connector on RMC
7 DB-9 Connector on APM 1 In prime racks only connected to APM 1.
In expansion racks the APM 1 leg is connected to the cable
with P/N 3082467Y03 and strapped to the rack accessible
from the left side.
8 DB-9 Connector on APM 2 In prime racks the APM 2 leg is strapped close to APM 2
but not connected.
In expansion racks the APM 2 leg is strapped to the rack.

5 - 16 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Interconnection and Cabling

In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In

Ethernet
5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1

Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2


/RX1-In /RX2-In

User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3

LOCATED ON TOP OF CABINET

STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3 RFS1 RFS2 BR3 BR4 BR1 BR2

B -48Vdc A B RETURN A

APM 2 APM 1
5

8 7

LOCATED IN FRONT OF CABINET

A
-48V RTN CONTROLLER A CONTROLLER B CONTROL RF1
Motorola PARALLEL PARALLEL
USER ALARM/CONTROL SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL
ENVIRONMENTAL
ALARM SYSTEM
Tanapa No.: CLN1685 RF2 RF3

INPUT -48V , 0.5A

GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1 10/100B-T
3
GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1
4

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN


B 5MHZ/1 PPS A

4
A
RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

(RFDS POWER) 5MHZ/1 PPS B


B
5MHZ/1 PPS A
5MHZ/1 PPS A

3
ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3

GROUN AC

6
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

2
B 5MHZ/1 PPS A

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN


B 5MHZ/1 PPS A

I/O BOARD (TOP VIEW)

TEBTS036B

Figure 5-9 Cabinet Alarm Harness Connections Diagram

6866538D01-C 5 - 17
February 2005
Interconnection and Cabling

Site Alarm Cabling


Table 5-10 identifies and Figure 5-10 shows the site alarm cabling.

Table 5-10 Site Alarm Cabling

Index Part Number From To Notes

1 3082477Y03 Status connector on Power Alarm RF1 connector on Junction For prime racks only.
Distribution Panel Panel and LNA Alarm Expansion Multi-circuit Y-cable assembly
RJ45 connector on I/O Board
2 3084225N02 LNA Standard Alarm RJ45 RF1 connector on EAS For prime racks only
connector on I/O Board
3 3082733X02 Shorting plug connects to Control Caution: If plug is not used, false alarms
connector on EAS will result.
4 3083892X05 User Alarm/Control connector User Alarm/Control connector on For prime racks only
on EAS Junction Panel
5 3082733X04 Shorting plug connects to RF2 and Caution: If plug is not used, false alarms
RF3 connectors on EAS and will result.
Alarm RF1 connector on Junction
Panel, if it is not used for alarms.
10 3084225N43 Alarm RF1 connector on LNA Standard Alarm RJ45 For expansion racks only
Junction Panel connector on I/O Board
11 3082129X03 Status connector on Power LNA Alarm Expansion RJ45 For expansion racks only
Distribution Panel connector on I/O Board
12 3082467Y03 For expansion racks only
The cable extends the APM 1 leg of the
Cabinet Alarm Harness, so it can be fed to
prime APM 2 (see Table 5-9, “Cabinet
Alarm Harness Connections,” on page 5-
16, Index 7).
13 3084225N43 Alarm RF1 connector on Alarm RF1 connector on Junction For expansion racks only
Junction Panel on prime racks Panel on expansion racks

5 - 18 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Interconnection and Cabling

13

In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In

Ethernet Ethernet
5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1 5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1

Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2 Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2
/RX1-In /RX2-In /RX1-In /RX2-In

User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3


5 User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3

LOCATED ON TOP OF CABINET LOCATED ON TOP OF CABINET

STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3 RFS1 RFS2 BR3 BR4 BR1 BR2 STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3 RFS1 RFS2 BR3 BR4 BR1 BR2

B -48Vdc A B RETURN A B -48Vdc A B RETURN A

12
10

11
1
4

-48V RTN CONTROLLER A CONTROLLER B CONTROL RF1


Motorola PARALLEL PARALLEL
USER ALARM/CONTROL SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL
ENVIRONMENTAL
ALARM SYSTEM
Tanapa No.: CLN1685 RF2 RF3

INPUT -48V , 0.5A

GPS

-48V RTN
BAT
T1/E1

1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3


SITE REF OUT

2 1
X.21
10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1 10/100B-T
2
GPS

-48V RTN
BAT
T1/E1

1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3


SITE REF OUT

2 1
5 X.21
10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1

RX 3 RX 3

GROUN AC GROUN AC

RX 2 RX 2

DC DC

RX 1 RE RX 1 RE
BLACK BLACK

BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3 RX 3

GROUN AC GROUN AC

RX 2 RX 2

DC DC

RX 1 RX 1 RE
RE
BLACK BLACK

BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3 RX 3

GROUN AC GROUN AC

RX 2 RX 2

DC DC

RX 1 RX 1 RE
RE
BLACK BLACK

BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3 RX 3

AC GROUN AC
GROUN
RX 2 RX 2

DC DC

RX 1 RX 1 RE
RE
BLACK BLACK

BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA FB PA IN 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN
PA OUT

PRIME EXPANSION
TEBTS090B

Figure 5-10 Site Alarm Cabling Diagram

6866538D01-C 5 - 19
February 2005
Interconnection and Cabling

RS-232 Cabling
The RS-232 Cabling described applies only to the Auto Tune Cavity Combiner. Table 5-11
identifies and Figure 5-11 shows the RS-232 cabling.

Table 5-11 RS-232 Cabling

Index Part Number From To Notes

1 3082467Y01 RS-232 connector on ATCC RS-232 connector on Base Radio 1


Control Board

5 - 20 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Interconnection and Cabling

In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In

Ethernet
5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1

Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2


/RX1-In /RX2-In

User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3

LOCATED ON TOP OF CABINET

STATUS CTRL A EAS/IMU CTRL B RFS3 RFS1 RFS2 BR3 BR4 BR1 BR2

B -48Vdc A B RETURN A

LOCATED IN FRONT OF CABINET

-48V RTN CONTROLLER A CONTROLLER B CONTROL RF1


Motorola PARALLEL PARALLEL
USER ALARM/CONTROL SYSTEM ALARM/CONTROL
ENVIRONMENTAL
ALARM SYSTEM
Tanapa No.: CLN1685 RF2 RF3

INPUT -48V , 0.5A

GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1 10/100B-T

GPS

SITE REF OUT

T1/E1
BAT
X.21
-48V RTN 1 2 3 4 REDUND SERIAL PARALLEL 3 2 1 10B2-3 10B2-2 10B2-1

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

1 5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

RX 3

GROUN AC
RX 2

DC

RX 1 RE
BLACK
BLACK AC WITH BATTERY REVERT RED
EX EX
ETHERNET ETHERNET

5MHZ/1 PPS B 5MHZ/1 PPS A ALARM RS 232 PA OUT PA FB PA IN

TEBTS089B

Figure 5-11 RS-232 Cabling Diagram

6866538D01-C 5 - 21
February 2005
Interconnection and Cabling

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

5 - 22 6866538D01-C
February 2005
6

6Configuration and Testing

Setup and Testing Overview


The setup and testing procedures covered in this manual are intended to be used in conjunction
with the information provided in Chapter 7, “EBTS System Troubleshooting” and Chapter 3,
“EBTS Interface Commands”. Together, the troubleshooting solutions and testing procedures,
provide the necessary information to isolate failures to a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) or
Replaceable Part. This helps to keep system down-time to a minimum by quickly returning the
site to normal operation.

All suspected faulty FRUs should be shipped to a Motorola depot facility for servicing or repair.

MMI Commands

You must be familiar with Man-Machine Interface (MMI) commands and their usage prior to
performing procedures in this chapter. Improperly applying MMI commands can result in
equipment damage.

Chapter 3, “EBTS Interface Commands” serves as a tutorial and reference for using the software
commands. If you are not totally familiar with using the commands, read Chapter 3, “EBTS
Interface Commands” before proceeding.

Service technicians can communicate with the EBTS through the use of MMI commands and a
service computer. MMI commands provide testing capabilities with access to alarm log files and
various diagnostic tests. MMI commands also provide a means to configure the Site Controller
and Base Radio(s) for intended operation, and to enable various system tests.
Two different command sets, Site Controller and Base Radio (BR), allow testing of the EBTS via
the MMI.
A select number of MMI commands are used in the procedures within this chapter. The complete
set of MMI commands, including both Site Controller and BR commands, are defined in Chapter
3, “EBTS Interface Commands”.

6866538D01-C 6-1
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

Setup and Testing Procedures


The setup and test procedures in this manual are used to test the functionality of the EBTS and
help isolate failures to the module level. If a failure cannot be isolated after performing these tests,
refer to the tables in Chapter 11, “Backplane” for additional information.
The setup and testing procedures are divided into the following chapters:
• Site Controller Setup and Verification
• Equipment Cabinet Setup/Verification
• Conformance Testing
For Site Controller Indicators please refer to Table 8-2 on page 8-3.

6-2 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

Site Controller Setup and Verification


The Site Controller setup and checkout procedures specify steps that verify operation within the
Site Controller. The Site Controller Verification consists of:

Section Page Description

Site Controller Test 6-3 Identifies all recommended test equipment for the Site
Equipment Controller Verification
Service Terminal Setup 6-4 Describes how to connect a service terminal
Site Controller Setup 6-4 Describes how to connect a service computer, and also how to
decompress and download the application code
E1 Connection Test 6-6 Describes how to perform X.21 loopback to test X.21 interface
and cabling
E1 Connection Test 6-6 Describes how to perform E1 loopback to test E1 interface and
cabling
EAS Alarm Checkout 6-7 Describes how to check for proper alarm system functioning
Site Reference Check 6-8 Describes how to check for proper SRI functioning
Optional Modem 6-10 Optionally, a modem may be connected to the Site Controller
Configuration serial port.

Site Controller Test Equipment


Table 6-1 lists the recommended Site Controller test equipment.

Table 6-1 Test Equipment for Site Controller Testing

Equipment Model/Type Supplier Description

Service Terminal VT100 or compatible† Locally procured Local service terminal


RS-232 Cable Locally procured Straight-through serial cable with
DB-9 connector that mates with
Site Controller “service access”
front panel connector
† A personal computer (PC) with VT100 emulation software may be used instead.

6866538D01-C 6-3
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

Service Terminal Setup


This procedure assumes power is applied to the EBTS system but the Site Controller has not yet
been switched on. If power is not applied, perform the procedures in Chapter 4 - Final Checkout.
In the following procedures, whenever you are instructed to enter software commands they will
be presented in bold lettering. Enter all commands exactly as they appear. The command prompt
will precede the command, as in the following example.
Example: SC> help
1 Connect an RS-232 cable from the serial port on the service terminal to the serial port on the
front of the Site Controller.
2 Apply power to the service terminal.
After the service computer initialises, the screen will normally be blank.
3 Configure the service terminal’s RS-232 port with the parameters listed in Table 6-2.

Table 6-2 RS-232 Port Configuration

Description Setting

Baud Rate 19200


Parity Bit none
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1

Site Controller Setup

If an EBTS or TSC is moved, it is important to clear the site location memory to force the first
restart at the new location to be a cold start.
To clear the site location enter the following command on the TSC terminal whilst the EBTS is
running in application mode:
site_location -reset
Then restart the site controller to allow calculation of it’s new location to commence
(site survey)

1 Start-up the service terminal.


2 Power up the Site Controller.
3 After the self-test is complete, verify that messages similar to the following appear on the
service terminal:

6-4 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

Dimetra Site Controller


Firmware version axx.xx.xx
Software Part No. xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
(C) Copyright 2001 Motorola LTd. All rights reserved
Unauthorised access prohibited

To enter configuration mode, ‘Return’ within 10 seconds:

4 Press the ‘Return’ key within 10 seconds. When prompted, enter your name and the proper
password.
5 The default password is motorola .
6 The SC> prompt is displayed on the service terminal once the correct password has been
entered.
7 At the SC> prompt, type: ver -h.
This returns version information of the Site Controller hardware and software.

Typing help will list all available commands in the Site Controller command set, prior to
downloading.

8 At the SC> prompt, type: test -all This tests that all of the peripheral components are present
and have been initialised correctly.
9 The following display should appear:

SC> test -all


X21 device driver successfully initialised
EAS detected O.K.
Ethernet device driver successfully initialised
Flash Filing System device driver successfully initialised
SRI/GPS device driver successfully initialised

The output will reflect the status of the currently selected site link driver, i.e. X.21 or E1.

If any device drivers are reported as “failed to initialise” or the EAS is “not detected”, then this
indicates a problem with that peripheral.
However, successful initialisation of a device does not guarantee that it is fully functional; further
tests are necessary to ensure this.
With the exception of the EAS test, the above tests are carried out upon power-up or reset. The
command simply reports the last status of the test. To actually re-run the tests, it is necessary to
reset the Site Controller.
10 Further Site Controller commands are available as described in Chapter 3, “EBTS Interface
Commands”. These may also be listed by typing help at the SC> prompt.

6866538D01-C 6-5
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

This procedure may be halted and re-started at any time by pressing the RESET pushbutton for
at least 2 seconds on the Site Controller front panel.

E1 Connection Test
The E1 connection test requires that the site controller is connected to an active E1 line.
The E1 tests the connection between the TSC and the CNE core router.
1 At the SC> prompt, type: loop -test
This will initiate the sending of packets to the core router, and the monitoring of the returned data.

Dual APM Test


The following procedure insures the correct configuration of the dual APM feature and BR to
APM mapping.
This test requires that dummy loads are connected to the antenna feeds.
1 With BRs de-keyed connect dummy load to each antenna output.
2 Reduce output power of BRs accordingly for dummy load.
3 Remove dummy load from one antenna, and insure correct BRs dekeyed.

Starting The Application Software


Within the Application mode, the EAS and SRI statuses are checked. Start the Application
software as follows:
1 Ensure that all Base Radios are powered off.
2 At the SC> prompt, type run
3 When prompted, enter your name and the proper password. (The default password is motorola.)
The SC) prompt is displayed (instead of the SC> prompt) on the service computer once the correct
password has been entered.

If an EBTS or TSC is moved, it is important to clear the site location memory to force the first
restart at the new location to be a cold start. To clear the site location enter the following command
on the TSC terminal whilst the EBTS is running in application mode:
site_location -reset
Then restart the site controller to allow calculation of it’s new location to commence (site survey.)

6-6 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

EAS Alarm Checkout


The following procedure verifies correct wiring of the alarms monitored by the Environmental
Alarm System.

Perform this procedure only after the Starting the Application Software procedure has been
performed. Service terminal must currently be displaying the SC) prompt in order to perform the
following procedure.

1 At the SC) prompt, type: status eas -Pn (where pN is the EAS plug number in the range P5-P10)
Information similar to the following is displayed on the service computer:

SC)status eas

Plug P9 Status
INPUT REF. DESCRIPTION STATE
4 Fire Alarm OK
6 Power Failure OK
7 Battery backup 1 failure OK
8 Battery backup 2 failure OK

OUTPUT REF. DESCRIPTION STATE


23 RFDS o/p 1 OFF
25 RFDS o/p 2 OFF

2 To verify a particular alarm, perform the proper action to trigger it.


For example, the following describes this verification.
2.1 Open the site entry door.
2.2 Type: status eas
The status of the Site Entry alarm changes to the alarm state.
2.3 Close the site door.
2.4 Type: status eas
The Site Entry alarm returns the OK condition.
3 Verify other alarms for proper wiring by triggering them as described above.

Some actions can trigger more than one alarm, such as switching off the main breaker to the Site
Controller. Other alarms are site-specific and may or may not be wired. These are generally more
difficult to trigger on a manual basis.

6866538D01-C 6-7
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

Site Reference Check


Verify the GPS Receiver status as follows:

Perform this procedure only after Starting the Application Software. The service terminal must
currently be displaying the SC> prompt in order to perform the following procedure.

1 At the SC> prompt, type: status sri


Verify that:
• the GPS Training State is “Closely Trained.”
• the Free Run state is “False.”
The GPS LED will flash satellite tracking commences and will be fully on once GPS is fully
trained.
If satellite tracking is NOT ADEQUATE, make sure:
• the GPS receiver has been allowed enough time to locate the satellites (in extreme cases
this may take up to 2 hours)
• the GPS antenna cable is properly connected. If it is not, reconnect the cable properly and
then reset the Site Controller. If cable is found to be properly connected, the GPS antenna
is possibly faulty.
Refer to Chapter 7, “EBTS System Troubleshooting” for more information on troubleshooting
GPS

Do not attempt to make a resistance check of the GPS antenna. Damage to the active devices
within the antenna element may result.

Redundant Site Controller Check


This procedure verifies that the any redundant TSC in an EBTS is correctly configured and should
be able to take-over in the event of the active TSC failing.
In an EBTS with a redundant TSC either TSC A (upper TSC) or TSC B (lower TSC) may take
the role of the active TSC at power-up.

Configuration Mode Checks


1 Verify using TESS that both TSC's are configured with the same TSC and BRC code and
configuration files.
2 Verify using the MMI command 'id' that the uppermost TSC has identity 'A' and the lowermost
TSC has identity 'B'. These identities are used in reporting faults to the CNE and to then ensure
correct TSC identification. This command can also be used to configure the TSC identity if
required.
3 Verify using the 'force_active' command on the standby TSC (TSC with active LED off) that
the standby TSC can take control. The active LED should now illuminate. This check verifies
operation of the TSC interlock mechanism and interlock cable.

6-8 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

This check should be performed with both TSC’s in configuration mode.

4 Repeat the previous process with the other Site Controller

Application Mode Checks


1 From the Application mode MMI use the command 'status peer'. This command will verify
inter-TSC communication and provides a further check on the TSC configuration. The
expected output of this command is as follows:

Peer Status
Peer Health: Peer TSC responding and configured
Peer SC ID: B

2 Switch-over to the standby TSC can be verified by switching off the active TSC or using the
MMI reset command on the active TSC. This check should only be performed if loss of
operational service is acceptable.

Redundant BR Checks
In Dimetra IP systems the TSC may be configured to control a redundant BR to either provide
back-up Base Radio operation, in the event of a Base Radio failing, If configured this Base Radio
can also be switched in by the CNE to provide extra capacity. This feature is configured by the
EBTS Service Software (TESS). The redundant BR feature requires either an Auto Tune Cavity
Combiner (ATCC) or a hybrid combiner to operate, as the standby BR must be able to configure
itself to the radio frequency used by a failed BR. In systems with multiple ATCC's, minimum
channel separation must not only be maintained between channels on each ATCC, but also
between channels of all ATCC's. This allows the redundant BR to be able to replace any failed
BR and allows the redundant BR's ATCC to maintain correct channel separation. Note that, only
the last BR (highest position number) in the EBTS may be configured for redundant BR
operation.

Verification Checks
Switch-over to the standby BR may be precipitated by turning off one of the active operational
BRs.

This operation should only be performed if some loss of operational service is acceptable.

The status of each BR at the site may be obtained using one of the applications mode MMI
command 'status sc -all' or 'status br', e.g. to determine if any BR has failed.
Note that, a failed BR will remain replaced by the standby BR until the either the ZM requests a
reset of the standby BR position or the 'reset -br' MMI command is used to reset the standby BR
position.

6866538D01-C 6-9
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

Optional Modem Configuration


Optionally, a modem may be connected to the Site Controller rear SERIAL port. In order to be
able to dial the modem and communicate with the Site Controller, the following configuration
must be performed. The commands shown are for the Motorola 3265 Fast modem. This
configuration need only be performed once and is stored as the default configuration in the
modem in case the modem is reset. The modem should be temporarily disconnected from the Site
Controller and connected to the serial port of the service computer via an RS-232 cable to perform
the configuration.
Configure the modem as follows:
1 Connect modem to the service computer using an RS-232 cable.

The RS-232 cable should be 25 pin male D-type for connection to the modem and 9 or 25 pin
female D-type for connection to the service computer. The cable should be straight through
(DCE-DTE) with at least the following lines connected: TX, RX, RTS, CTS, DSR, Signal
Ground, DCD, DTR.

2 Start-up the service terminal.


3 Type AT, then press Enter and verify that the “OK” response is received from the modem. If
no response is received, check that the modem has power connected, and that the modem is
correctly connected to the service terminal.
4 Type AT& F1 key, then press Enter and verify that the “OK” response is received from the
modem.
5 Type AT&D0E0Q2S0=1 (NB. This is specific to the Motorola Fast modem.) then press Enter
and verify that the “OK” response is received from the modem.
6 Type AT&W0 then press Enter and verify that the “OK” response is received from the modem.
7 Type AT&Y0, then press Enter and verify that the “OK” response is received from the
modem.
8 Reconnect the modem to the Site Controller rear SERIAL port and attempt to dial the modem
from a remote station.
9 The remote station should be able to communicate with the Site Controller, display the MMI
prompt, and display the output of commands entered.
The meanings of the above AT commands are shown below. If not using the recommended
modem, check your modem manual for the corresponding settings.

Table 6-3 AT Commands

AT Command Meaning

&F1 Load “factory Default” profile number (hardware handshaking)


E0 Echo off
&D0 Modem ignores DTR
Q2 Modem only displays result codes in Originate Mode. If the modem does
S0=1 Answer incoming calls after 1 ring

6 - 10 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

Table 6-3 AT Commands (continued)

AT Command Meaning

&W0 Copy the current profile to Stored Profile 0


Y0 Use Stored Profile 0 as the power-up default

6866538D01-C 6 - 11
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

Equipment Cabinet
Setup/Verification
The Equipment Cabinet setup and checkout procedures verify the operation of the Equipment
Cabinet and Base Radios. The Equipment Cabinet Verification consists of:

Section Page Description

Equipment Cabinet Test 6-12 Identifies all recommended test equipment for the
Equipment Equipment Cabinet Verification
Base Radio Start-up Sequence 6-13 Describes how to connect the service computer and start-up
the Base Radio
Selecting Base Radio Position 6-14 Describes how to select a Base Radio and its receivers using
and Receivers MMI commands
Displaying Base Radio 6-15 Describes how to verify the alarm conditions of the Base
Alarms Radio
Setting RX and TX 6-16 Describes how to program the Base Radio with the desired
Frequencies receive and transmit frequencies
Checking Transmit Operation 6-17 Describes how to verify proper transmit operation of the
Base Radio in a 2-4 channel system
Checking Receive Operation 6-20 Describes how to verify proper receive operation of the Base
Radio in a 2-4 channel system
Viewing the Transmit 6-24 Describes how to verify transmit operation through the use
Spectrum (optional) of a spectrum display analyser. This is an optional procedure
in the Equipment Cabinet Verification.

Equipment Cabinet Test Equipment


Table 6-4 lists the recommended test equipment for the Equipment Cabinet procedures.
Equivalent equipment is acceptable.

Table 6-4 Test Equipment for Equipment Cabinet Testing

Equipment Model/Type Manufacturer Description

Service Terminal † VT100 Locally Procured Used to access and interface with
Site Controller and BR MMI
RS-232 Cable 0102611X03 Motorola Straight-through connecting cable
with DB-9 connector for BRC port
Coaxial Directional Coupler 3041-20 Narda Used for receive test signal injection
into duplex Tx/Rx antenna port
Circulator, 917-942 MHz 9C30-41 Ferrocom
Load 375 BNM Narda

6 - 12 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

Table 6-4 Test Equipment for Equipment Cabinet Testing (continued)

Equipment Model/Type Manufacturer Description

RF Attenuator, 250 W, 10 dB 0180301E72 Motorola Used to attenuate receive signals for


testing
Rubidium Frequency PRFS Ball/Efratom Used as a frequency standard for
Standard (or 2008) (UCT) receive test
Signal Generator 3660 Anritsu (HP) Used for checking receive operation
(or ESG
w/UN4)
Spectrum Analyser Locally Procured Observing transmit signal and filter
bandwidth and power
Miscellaneous Cabling and Locally Procured Used to connect the signal generator
Connectors to the antenna ports
†Computer running suitable terminal emulation software (e.g., Procomm or equivalent) may be used in
place of VT100.

Base Radio Start-up Sequence

The following procedure assumes that test software resident in the BRC flash memory is being
used.
1 Connect the RS-232 port on the service computer to the SERVICE ACCESS port located on
the front of BRC.
2 Apply power to the BR and observe the service computer for memory self-test indication.
When the BR requests any key to be pressed, press “X” then return.
3 On the BRC, verify the condition of the LEDs (see Figure 6-1) for each Base Radio, as listed
in Table 6-5.

Table 6-5 Base Radio LED Indications

LED Colour Normal Indication

BR Green Flashing
PS Red Off
EX Red Off
PA Red Off
CTL Red Off
R1 Red Off
R2 Red Off
R3 Red Off
Refer to the Controls and Indicators section in the Chapter 11, “Base Radio” for
conditions relating to the LEDs listed above.

6866538D01-C 6 - 13
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

SERVICE ACCESS B R P S E X P A C T L R 1 R 2 R 3 RESET CONTROL

EBTS316
022800JNM

Figure 6-1 BRC Indicators

4 Verify the following LED conditions on the Base Radio Controller:


• All BRC LEDs flash 3 times upon initial power-up.
• BR LED flashes quickly when BR is waiting for code to be downloaded from Site
Controller.
• All BRC LEDs scroll during code downloading process.
• BR LED flashes slowly when BR is de-keyed.
• BR LED is solid when BR is keyed.
5 On the Power Supply module of the Base Radio, verify that the green LED is lit.

Selecting Base Radio Position and Receivers


During equipment cabinet setup, MMI is used to:
• Set the position of the Base Radios within the equipment cabinet.
• Select a particular Base Radio. This is required when assigning transmit and receive
frequencies to a particular Base Radio.
• Select a receiver complement within a Base Radio.
These operations are described below. Refer to Chapter 3, “EBTS Interface Commands” for
detailed information on using the MMI commands.

Setting and Accessing Base Radio Position


The set position command programs the position number where a Base Radio is mounted within
a selected cabinet.
The set cabinet command programs the cabinet number where the Base Radio is mounted. For
single cabinet EBTS, this is set to “1”. For multiple cabinet EBTS, the Base Radios in the first
cabinet are set to “1”; the Base Radios in the second cabinet are set to “2”, etc.
Base Radio designation starts from the bottom of the cabinet, with the lowest Base Radio
designated as “1”. For example, a cabinet with four Base Radios would have the lowest Base
Radio being designated as “1”, and the highest being designated as “4”.
This command would also be used in accessing a particular Base Radio within the cabinet.

6 - 14 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

Table 6-6 Example: 8 Base Radio Omni-EBTS

Cabinet 1 Cabinet 2

Cabinet = 1, Position = 4 Cabinet = 2, Position = 4


Cabinet = 1, Position = 3 Cabinet = 2, Position = 3
Cabinet = 1, Position = 2 Cabinet = 2, Position = 2
Cabinet = 1, Position = 1 Cabinet = 2, Position = 1

Selecting a Receiver Complement for a Base Radio


The set rx_fru_config command sets which receivers should be present in a selected Base Radio.
The command has provision for all possible complements of three receivers.
The set rx_mode command selectively enables any combination of individual receivers within a
selected Base radio, while disabling any receiver that was not specifically selected.

Displaying Base Radio Alarms


In the Site Controller procedures, the Base Radios were connected to the Site Controller and
received downloaded test software via the BR-Site Controller Ethernet link. If necessary, reset the
Base Radio to obtain the password prompt, or enter the configuration mode of the BR.
1 When prompted, type the proper password.
After entering the correct password, the BRC> prompt is displayed on the service computer.
The default password is motorola .

Enter login password:

BRC>

Motorola recommends changing the default password once proper operation of the equipment has
been verified.

2 At the BRC> prompt, type: set alarm_reports off

This command disables synchronous alarm reporting.

BRC> set alarm_reports off


set ALARM REPORTS TRACE to OFF in RAM

3 Type: get alarms

6866538D01-C 6 - 15
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

This command displays any outstanding alarm conditions. Alarms are handled as in the
following examples.
If any alarms are detected, they would be displayed on the service computer, for example:

BRC> get alarms


[brc fru warning]
[gps failure]

If no alarms are present during normal operation, this message is displayed:

BRC> get alarms


NO ALARM CONDITIONS DETECTED

Setting RX and TX Frequencies


Base Radio frequencies are factory set to a default receive and transmit frequencies. In some
instances, the Base Radio(s) may be configured to other frequencies per customer request.

Do not transmit to an antenna under any circumstance unless those frequencies are licensed.

Within the RF subsystem of the Dimetra EBTS, several variations of a given Field Replaceable
Unit (FRU) may exist in which each variation corresponds to a specific frequency range. Any
receive or transmit frequencies assigned to a Base Radio via a command must conform to any
existing hardware constraints.

Perform the following procedure if you know the actual frequencies required. Otherwise, use the
default frequencies.

Any frequencies selected using these commands will be over written by the frequencies in the
configuration file held in the Site Controller upon reset of the Base Radio.

1 At the BRC> prompt, type: dekey


This command stops all RF transmission.

BRC> dekey
XMIT OFF INITIATED

2 Type: set rx_freq XXX.XXXXX to set the receive frequency.

XXX.XXXXX represents the desired frequency in MHz.

6 - 16 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

Example:

BRC> set rx_freq 917.0125


set RECEIVE FREQUENCY to 917.0125 MHz in RAM

Type: set tx_freq XXX.XXXXX to set the transmit frequency.


XXX.XXXXX represents the desired frequency in MHz
Example

BRC> set tx_freq 932.0125


set TRANSMIT FREQUENCY to 932.0125 MHz in RAM

Checking Transmit Operation


The following procedures verify the transmission from antennas for a cavity combining RF
Distribution System.

Do not transmit to an antenna under any circumstance unless those frequencies are licensed.
Do not key any base radio with the Signal Generator directly connected to a Tx antenna port.
Damage to the generator will result.

Prior to performing the procedure for cavity combining transmit operation, perform the cavity
tuning procedure. This procedure is described in Chapter 10, “RF Distribution System (RFDS)”.

1 Connect the service computer into the local service port of the bottom Base Radio (BR1)
within the Equipment Cabinet and log on.
2 At the BRC> prompt, type: dekey
This command stops all RF transmission.

BRC> dekey
XMIT OFF INITIATED

The following command keys the transmitter. Make sure that transmission only occurs on
licensed frequencies or into a dummy load.

3 At the BRC> prompt, type:


set tx_power 80
This command sets the transmitter output to maximum rated output.

BRC> set tx_power xx


WORKING...
TRANSMITTER KEYED:49.92 watts

6866538D01-C 6 - 17
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

The following three commands will only give an indication of the link from the BR to the isolator
on the input of the Auto Tune Cavity Combiner (ATCC).

Use the ATC GET CAV_STATUS n command instead.

4 At the BRC> prompt, type: get fwd_pwr


This command returns the value of forward power as measured from the RF Power Amplifier.
Verify that the returned value meets the specifications of Table 6-7.

BRC> get fwd_pwr


FORWARD POWER is 39 watts [48.69 dbm]

5 At the BRC> prompt, type: get ref_pwr


This command returns the value of reflected power as measured from the RF Power Amplifier.
Verify that the returned value meets the specifications of Table 6-7.

BRC> get ref_pwr


REFLECTED POWER is 2 watts [31.9 dbm]

6 At the BRC> prompt, type: get vswr


This command returns the Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) from the RF Power
Amplifier. Verify that the returned value meets the specifications of Table 6-7.

BRC> get vswr


VSWR is 1.4:1

The reported VSWR should always be good, due to the isolator on the input of the ATCC. If the
reported VSWR is too high, this would indicate a faulty ATCC isolator.

7 At the BRC> prompt, type: get wattmeter


This command returns the forward and reverse power readings, and calculates the VSWR
from the power monitor located in the RFDS. Verify that the returned value meets the
specifications of Table 6-7.

This command is functional only on the bottom BR.

6 - 18 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

BRC> get wattmeter


FORWARD POWER AT WATTMETER is 26.3 watts
REFLECTED POWER AT WATTMETER is 0 watts
WATTMETER VSWR is 1.1:1

Table 6-7 Transmit Level Specifications

Function Tolerance 80 Watt PA

Forward Power Greater than 67 Watts


Reflected Power Less than 7 Watts
VSWR Less than 2.4:1 ratio
Wattmeter Forward Power Greater than 17.8 Watts
Wattmeter Reflected Power Less than 4.5 Watts

Refer to Chapter 10, “RF Distribution System (RFDS)” for figuring the transmit path loss when
using multiple channels in a single Equipment Cabinet.

8 At the BRC> prompt, type: get alarms


This command returns all active alarms of the Base Radio.

BRC> get alarms


NO ALARM CONDITIONS DETECTED

If the get alarms condition displays alarms, refer to Chapter 7, “EBTS System Troubleshooting”
for corrective actions.

9 At the BRC> prompt, type: dekey


This command stops all RF transmission.

BRC> dekey
XMIT OFF INITIATED

10 Proceed to the “Checking Receive Operation” procedure.

6866538D01-C 6 - 19
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

Checking Receive Operation


Receive operation test procedures must be performed on each Base Radio. Perform sensitivity
and Bit Error Rate (BER) floor measurements for each receiver within the Base Radios. Perform
the test as follows:

Prior to performing the procedure for cavity combining receive operation, perform the receiver
equalisation procedure. This procedure is described in Chapter 10, “RF Distribution System
(RFDS)”.

1 Connect the service computer to the local service port of the bottom Base Radio (BR1) and
log on.
The service port connector is located on the front of the Base Radio Controller module. The
default password is motorola .

Motorola recommends changing the default password once proper operation of the equipment has
been verified.

2 At the BRC> prompt, type: dekey


This command stops all RF transmission.

BRC> dekey
XMIT OFF INITIATED

RF energy hazard. Be sure the dekey command has been issued to all Base Radios in the cabinet
to prevent injury while disconnecting and connecting antennas.

Do not key any base radio with the Signal Generator directly connected to a Tx antenna port.
Damage to generator will result.

3 Set Signal Generator to OFF.

Steps 4 through 6 assume signal generator used is as specified in Table 6-4. If alternate equivalent
equipment is used, perform steps 4 through 6, as applicable.

4 Connect Frequency Standard 10 MHz OUTPUT to a 10 dB attenuator.


5 Connect other end of the attenuator to the 10 MHz REFERENCE OSCILLATOR IN/OUT
connector on the Signal Generator.
6 Set the Signal Generator to EXT REF mode.
7 Set Signal Generator to ON.
8 At the BRC> prompt, type: get rx_freq

6 - 20 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

This command displays the receive frequency for the current Base Radio. The message
appears as:

BRC> get rx_freq


RECEIVE FREQUENCY is 917.0125 MHz

9 Set the Signal Generator as follows:


9.1 Set generator frequency to the receive frequency determined in the previous step.
9.2 If using type-T1 (TETRA format) signal, configure the generator for the uplink
channel type to be tested (i.e., 7, 8, 9, 10, or 11). (Types 7 through 11 are available at
the BR.)
All receivers within a Base Radio have the same receive frequency and channel type.

If required, a TTL-level trigger signal for use by the generator is available on pin 9 of the BRC
DB-9 service port.

10 Disconnect the antenna cable connected to RX1 connector on Junction Panel. Connect the
Signal Generator output to RX1 connector.
Antenna connections are accessed from the top rear of the RF Distribution System as shown
in Figure 6-2.

RX1 DIVERSITY RECEIVE


ANTENNA CABLE

RX2 DIVERSITY RECEIVE


TX ANTENNA CABLES ANTENNA CABLE

In1 In2 In GPS A RX 1 In RX2 In RX3 In

Ethernet
5MHz/1PPS Ethernet Isolated Ground (Grounded) GPS B RX1 Out Rx2 Out Rx3 Out Alarm RF1

Out 1 Out 2 Out Tx1 Out Tx2 Out Alarm RF2


/RX1-In /RX2-In

User Alarm/Control E1 - 120Ω/X.21 A E1 - 120Ω/X.21 B Alarm RF3

TEBTS022B

Figure 6-2 Antenna Connections

11 At the BRC> prompt, type: set rx_mode 1


This command enables only antenna/receiver 1 while disabling the remaining
antenna/receivers. Repeat this step for all Base Radios within the cabinet.

BRC>set rx_mode 1
set RECEIVER 1 to ENABLED in RAM

12 Disconnect antenna connection at Junction Panel TX OUT connector. Connect a 250 Watt
dummy load to TX OUT connector.
13 At the BRC> prompt, configure set tetra_format nnnnnn for the configuration to be tested.

6866538D01-C 6 - 21
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

Refer to the “Configuring Test Signal Types” section earlier in this chapter for instructions on
using the set tetra_format command.

Sensitivity Measurement
For the following tests, make sure the Signal Generator is set to the same frequency as displayed
by the get rx_freq command.
1 With the receiver set up for the test as above, set the Signal Generator to generate the test
signal at an output level of -115 dBm at the RX1 connector. (This must take into account the
cable loss (dB) between the Signal Generator and the EBTS.)
2 At the BRC> prompt, type: key
Observe that the BR is producing full power.
3 At the BRC> prompt, type: set tx_test_mode T1
4 At the BRC> prompt, type: get rssi 2 100
This command performs a Bit Error Rate test on the received signal from the Signal Generator.
The example shown below illustrates sample values. Verify that the tolerance levels are within
the specifications listed.
To pass the receive sensitivity test, the BER must be less than 3% (3.0e+00%) on each line of
the displayed results.

BRC> get rssi 2 100


Starting RSSI monitor for 2 repetitions averaged each 100
reports.

Line RSSI1 RSSI2 RSSI3 SGC DIV BER SyncMiss


dBm dBm dBm dB dBm % %
---- ----- ----- ----- ---- ----- --------- ---------
100 -115.5 -127.0 -127.0 0.0 -127.0 1.826e+00 0.000e+00
200 -115.5 -127.0 -127.0 0.0 -127.0 1.701e+00 0.000e+00

BER Floor Measurement


1 With the receiver set up for the test above, set the Signal Generator to generate the test signal
at an output level of -85 dBm, taking into account the cable loss (dB) between the Signal
Generator and the EBTS.
2 At the BRC> prompt, type: get rssi 1 1000
This command performs a Bit Error Rate test on the received signal from the Signal Generator.
The example shown below illustrates sample values. Verify that the tolerance levels are within
the specifications listed.

6 - 22 6866538D01-C
February 2005
Configuration and Testing

To pass the BER floor test, the Bit Error Rate must be